Download Print this page

Tektronix TDS5000B Series Online Programmer Manual

Digital phosphor oscilloscopes

Hide thumbs Also See for TDS5000B Series:

Online help manual (420 pages)

,

Read this first manual (237 pages)

,

Service manual (180 pages)

Table Of Contents

page of 917

/ 917
Contents
Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Service Manual, Instruction Manual

Online Programmer Guide

TDS5000B Series

Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes

PHP023920 — Rev A

Adapted from the TDS5000B Series Online Programmer Guide

Version 2.0, July 15, 2004.

www.tektronix.com

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Table of Contents

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the TDS5000B Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Tektronix TDS5000B Series

Page 1 Online Programmer Guide TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes PHP023920 — Rev A Adapted from the TDS5000B Series Online Programmer Guide Version 2.0, July 15, 2004. www.tektronix.com...
Page 3: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Copyright and Version Information ......Getting Started ..... . Introduction .
Page 4 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order . . . *CAL? ............*CLS .
Page 5 CALibrate:INTERNal ......... CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt .
Page 6 CURSor:WAVEform:POSition<x> ......CURSor:WAVEform:SOUrce<x> ....... CURSor:WAVEform:STYle .
Page 7 DIAg:NUMITEMS? ......... . . DIAg:RESULts? .
Page 8 DISplay? ........... . EMail .
Page 9 HARDCopy:IMAGe ......... . . HARDCopy:LAYout .
Page 10 ........MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard (TDS5000B Series Option SM) ..
Page 11 ..........MASK:STANdard (TDS5000B Series Option SM) .
Page 12 MASK:TESt:REPeat ......... . MASK:TESt:SAMple .
Page 13 ......MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 ......MEASUrement:IMMed:NOISe (TDS5000B Series option SM) ..MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH .
Page 14 ........MEASUrement:NOISe (TDS5000B Series option SM) .
Page 15 SAVe:SETUp ..........SAVe:WAVEform .
Page 16 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern? ........TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE ..... . TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce .
Page 17 TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn ......TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition? ....... . TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit .
Page 18 VERBose ........... WFMInpre? .
Page 19 ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit ........ZOOm:ZOOM<x>...
Page 21: Copyright And Version Information
Copyright and Version Information Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Page 22: Getting Started
Getting Started Introduction This online programmer guide provides you with the information re- quired to use GPIB commands for remotely controlling your instru- ment. With this information, you can write computer programs that will perform functions such as setting the front- -panel controls, taking mea- surements, performing statistical calculations, and exporting data for use in other programs, such as spreadsheets.
Page 23: Setting Up Remote Communications
Miscellaneous. This topic contains miscellaneous information, such as a list of reserved words, a table of the factory initialization (default) settings, and GPIB interface specifications that may be helpful when using GPIB commands to remotely control the instrument. Setting Up Remote Communications Before setting up the instrument for remote communications using the electronic (physical) GPIB interface, you should familiarize yourself with the following GPIB requirements:...
Page 24 If necessary, the GPIB connectors can be stacked as shown in the figure below. Setting the GPIB Address To function correctly, your instrument must have a unique device ad- dress. The default settings for the GPIB configuration are: GPIB Address GPIB ModeGPIB Talk/Listen To change either of the GPIB settings, do the following:...
Page 25 2. Click the Configuration Talk/Listen button. 3. Change the GPIB Address to a unique address. 4. Click the Close button. The instrument is now set up for bidirectional communication with your controller. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 5 --...
Page 26: Documentation
It also provides concepts and theories about using the instrument that are not covered in the online help. TDS5000B Series Online Help. This is an online help system that is integrated with the User Interface application that ships with this product. The online help provides in- -depth operation and user interface help.
Page 27: Command Syntax
Command Syntax Syntax Overview You can control the operations and functions of the instrument through the GPIB interface using commands and queries. The related topics listed below describe the syntax of these commands and queries. The topics also describe the conventions that the instrument uses to process them.
Page 28 Messages A command message is a command or query name followed by any information the instrument needs to execute the command or query. Command messages may contain five element types, defined in the following table. Command Message Elements Symbol Meaning <Header>...
Page 29: Clearing The Instrument
Queries Queries cause the instrument to return status or setting information. Queries have the structure: • [:]<Header>? • [:]<Header>?[<Space><Argument> [<Coma><Argument>]...] You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless otherwise noted. These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics below the specified branch or level.
Page 30 The instrument ignores commands consisting of any combination of white space characters and line feeds. Abbreviating You can abbreviate many instrument commands. Each command in this documentation shows the abbreviations in capitals. For example, you can enter the command ACQuire:NUMAvg simply as ACQ:NUMA or acq:numa.
Page 31: Constructed Mnemonics
If the header is on: :DISPLAY:COLOR:BACKGROUND 7; :DISPLAY:COLOR:FOREGROUND 0 If the header is off: 5. Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message. For example, ACQuire:MODe SAMple;NUMAVg?;STATE? is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample. The message then queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state.
Page 32 four- -channel instruments or CH1 or CH2 for two- -channel instruments. You use these mnemonics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic. For example, there is a CH1:POSition command, and there is also a CH2:POSition command. In the command descriptions, this list of choices is abbreviated as CH<x>.
Page 33: Argument Types
Reference Waveform Mnemonics Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header. Reference Waveform Mnemonics Symbol Meaning REF<x> A reference waveform specifier; <x> is 1 through 4 for four-- channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-- channel instruments.
Page 34 2. You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the previous rule. For example, ”this is an ’acceptable’ string”. 3. You can include a quote character within a string by repeating the quote. For example: ”here is a ”” mark”. 4.
Page 35: Command Groups
Command Groups Acquisition Command Group Use the commands in the Acquisition Command Group to set up the modes and functions that control how the instrument acquires the sig- nals you input to the channels and processes them into waveforms. Using these commands for acquiring waveforms, you can do the fol- lowing: Start and stop acquisitions.
Page 36: Alias Command Group
Alias names do not appear in response messages. The Alias commands are defined in Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats. Deviations between that standard and what is specified here will be considered TDS5000 series errors unless specifically noted in the command description in this document.
Page 37: Calibration Command Group
Calibration Command Group The calibration commands provide information about the current state of instrument calibration and allow you to initiate internal signal path calibration (SPC). Commands that are specific to factory calibration are not described in this manual; however, they are described in the service manual (located on your TDS5000B Product Software CD- -ROM in PDF format).
Page 38 Waveform Cursors. Consists of two cursors you can independent- ly assign to a waveform. These cursors provide the same readouts that the vertical and horizontal bar cursors provide. Waveform cursors enable you to conveniently measure waveform amplitude and time. In XY or XYZ format, waveform cursors indicate the amplitude position of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage, where Ch1 is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.
Page 39: Diagnostic Command Group
CURSor:WAVEform:VDELTA? Returns the vertical difference between waveform cursors CURSor:WAVEform Sets or returns the current settings for waveform cursors CURSor:XY:PRODDELta? Returns the product of the difference between the cursors X positions and Y positions CURSor:XY:PRODUCT<x>? Returns the product of the X and Y positions for the specified cursor CURSor:XY:RADIUS<x>...
Page 40 DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS? Returns the number of subitems associ- ated with this item DIAg:LEVEL Sets the current level of diagnostic test hierarchy DIAg:LOOPS? Returns the number fo times the diag- nostics were completed during the last execution DIAg:NAMe? Returns the subsystem name, area, and test name of the current diagnostic test DIAg:NAMe:AREA?
Page 41: Display Control Command Group
Display Control Command Group Use the commands in the Display Control Command Group to change the graticule style, the displayed intensities, and to set the characteris- tics of the waveform display. You can set the display of date and time; cursor, histogram, mask, and measurement readouts;...
Page 42 Sets or returns the user palette DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr: mask hits color MASK:Highlight DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr: Sets or returns the user palette math colors MATH<x> DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr: Sets or returns the user palette REF<x> reference colors Returns the user palette group DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr? settings DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr Sets or returns the color to be used for reference traces DISplay:COLOr? Returns color group settings...
Page 43: E--Mail Command Group
E- mail Command Group Commands in the E- -mail group allow you to send e- -mail to one or more designated recipients whenever a selected event, such as a trigger, mask test failure (Option SM only), or a limit test failure occurs in the instrument.
Page 44: File System Command Group
EMail:SMTPPort Sets or queries the SMTP port number that the e--mail server uses EMail:SMTPServer Sets or queries the address of the SMTP mail server. EMail:STATus? Queries the status of e--mail. EMail:TIMEout Sets or queries the global timeout in seconds. EMail:TO Sets or queries the address of the recipient(s) of an e--mail.
Page 45: Hard Copy Command Group
Command Description FILESystem? Returns the file system state FILESystem:COPy Copies one or more files to a new file FILESystem:CWD Sets or returns the current working directory for FILESystem GPIB commands. FILESystem:DELEte Deletes a named file or directory FILESystem:DIR? Returns a list of directory contents FILESystem:MKDir Makes a new directory FILESystem:PRInt...
Page 46: Histogram Command Group
Histogram Command Group Histogram commands let you select the type of histogram, what part of the waveform should go into the histogram, and histogram statistics. Use commands from this group to do the following: Create a histogram of vertical or horizontal values for a channel, math, or reference waveform Adjust the limits of the waveform area from which the histogram data is obtained...
Page 47: Horizontal Command Group
Get the screen resolution, time of first point and time of last point, or get all the horizontal settings Enable or disable the display of the time base You may substitute SECdiv for SCAle in the horizontal commands. This provides program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instruments. Command Description...
Page 48 HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp: Returns the relative time between DELTa:<wfm>? the triggers of the FastFrame Se- lected and the FastFrame Refer- ence, within the specified waveform HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp: Returns the absolute trigger date FRAMe:<wfm>? and time for the specified frame and waveform HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp: Returns the absolute trigger date REF? and time for FastFrame reference HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:...
Page 49: Limit Test Command Group
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle Sets time per division for the main time base Or returns the main time base hori- zontal scale HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts Sets or returns the units for the hor- izontal main time base HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing Sets or returns the units string for the horizontal main time base trig- ger delay HORizontal:MAIn?
Page 50 Set up test failure notification, lock the template to a waveform, and highlight hits. Sound a beep when a limit test fails. Send a screen print to the default printer when a limit test fails. Save waveform data to either a default directory or to a directory of your choice when a limit test fails.
Page 51 Command Description LIMit:BEEP Sounds beep when limit exceeded LIMit:COMpare Resets the Limit test comparison template LIMit:COMpare:CH<x> Sets or returns the waveform tem- plate to which the specified wave- form is compared Sets or returns the waveform tem- LIM- plate to which the specified math wa- it:COMpare:MATH<x>...
Page 52: Mask Command Group
LIMit:TEMPlate:TOLer- Sets or queries the amount, in units of vertical divisions, by which the ance:VERTical source waveform is varied vertically when creating the destination wave- form Limit? Returns all settings for the Limit com- mands Mask Command Group Use the commands in the Mask Command Group to compare incoming waveforms against standard or user- -defined telecommunications masks.
Page 53 Command Description MASK? Returns the states of all settable mask parameters MASK:AUTOAdjust Optimizes signal position within the mask to minimize hits MASK:AUTOAdjust:HDEL- Sets or returns how far autofit searches horizontally Sets or returns how far autofit MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDEL- searches vertically MASK:AUTOSet:AUTOAd- Controls what happens at the end of a mask autoset.
Page 54 MASK:COUNt:TOTal? Returns the sum of all hits in all mask segments MASK:COUNt:VIOLA- Returns the number of test violations that have occurred in the current pass/ TIONS? fail test MASK:COUNt:WAVE- Returns the number of waveforms that have been acquired and processed FORMS? during pass/fail testing MASK:DISplay...
Page 55 MASK:MASKPRE:WIDth Sets or returns the nominal bit width in seconds MASK:POLarity Sets or returns the input waveform po- larity for the pass/fail test MASK:SEG<m> DELEte Deletes the specified mask segment from the Current mask MASK:SEG<m>:NR_Pt? Returns the number of points that make up the specified mask segment of the Current mask MASK:SEG<m>:POINTS...
Page 56 MASK:TESt:STATUS? Returns the pass/fail test status MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure Sets or returns the stop status on pass/fail test failure mode MASK:TESt:THReshold Sets or returns the number of failed tested waveforms needed in each pass/fail test to cause the pass/fail sta- tus to change from PASSING to FAIL- MASK:TESt:WAVEform Sets or returns the number of wave- forms to test during pass/fail testing...
Page 57: Math Command Group
Math Command Group Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and define math waveforms. You can define and display up to four math wave- forms simultaneously on four channel models and up to two on two channel models. Use the available math functions to define your math waveform.
Page 58: Measurement Command Group
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG Sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag function in the specified math string MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE Sets or returns the units of the SpectralPhase function in the specified math string MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel Sets or returns the vertical position of the out- put data from the spectral analyzer MATH<x>:SPECTral Sets or returns the spectral reference level...
Page 59 Command Description MEASUrement:GATing Sets or returns the measurement gating MEASUrement:IMMed? Returns all immediate measure- ment setup parameters MEASUrement:IMMed:DElay? Returns information about the immediate delay measurement MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction Sets or returns the search direc- tion to use for immediate delay measurements MEASUrement:IMMed:DElay:EDGE[1] Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for immediate delay ”from”...
Page 60 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt? Returns the number of values accumulated since the last sta- tistical reset MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay: Sets or returns the search direc- DIREction tion to use for delay measure- ments MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1] Sets or returns the slope of the edge to use for delay ”from” wa- veform measurements MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 Sets or returns the slope of the...
Page 61 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev? Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated since the last statistical reset MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Sets or returns the measure- ment<x> type MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? Returns measurement<x> units MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? Returns the value of measure- ment<x> MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? Returns all measurement param- eters for the displayed measure- ment MEASUrement:METHod Sets or returns the method used...
Page 62: Miscellaneous Command Group
Miscellaneous Command Group Miscellaneous commands do not fit into other categories. Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2- -1987 devices on the GPIB bus. The 488.2- -1987 standard defines these commands. The common commands begin with an asterisk (*) character. Command Description *DDT...
Page 63: Save And Recall Command Group
Save and Recall Command Group Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to store and retrieve internal waveforms and settings. When you save a setup, you save all the settings of the instrument. When you recall a setup, the instrument restores itself to the state that it was in when you originally saved that setting.
Page 64: Status And Error Command Group
Status and Error Command Group Use the commands in the Status and Error command Group to deter- mine the status of the instrument and control events. Several commands and queries used with the instrument are common to all devices on the GPIB bus. The IEEE Std 488.2- -1987 defines these commands and queries.
Page 65: Trigger Command Group
Trigger Command Group Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all as- pects of triggering for the instrument. There are two triggers: A and B. Where appropriate, the command set has parallel constructions for each trigger. You can set the A or B triggers to edge mode. Edge triggering lets you display a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a voltage level of your choosing.
Page 66 TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe Sets or returns the slope for the A edge trigger TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger TRIGger:A:EDGE? Returns the source, coupling and source for the A edge trigger TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal? Returns the holdoff time ac- tually used by the A trigger TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY Sets or returns the type of...
Page 67 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce Sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa Sets or returns the data volt- :THReshold age threshold for setup and hold trigger TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa? Returns the voltage thresh- old and data source for the setup/hold trigger TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime Sets or returns the hold time for the setup and hold viola-...
Page 68 TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT? Returns the current A runt pulse trigger logic input pa- rameters TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold Sets or returns logic thresh- :CH<x> old channels with runt for channel 1 through channel 4 TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc? Returns the current A runt pulse trigger logic parame- ters TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse runt trigger...
Page 69 TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition? Returns the delta time, polar- ity, and both upper and lower threshold limits for the transi- tion time trigger TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit Sets or returns the upper lim- it for the A pulse width trigger TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit Sets or returns the lower limit for the A pulse width trigger TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity Sets or returns the polarity...
Page 70 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD Sets or returns the trigger holdoff in video field units TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE Sets or returns the trigger delay as a number of video lines TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity Sets or returns the polarity of the video trigger TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN Sets or returns the video scan rate TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce Sets or returns the video trig-...
Page 71: Vertical Command Group
(channel) waveforms for acquisition and to control the display of channel, reference, and math waveforms. You may replace VOLts with SCAle in the vertical commands. This provides program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instru- ments. Command Description CH<x>?
Page 72: Waveform Transfer Command Group
CH<x>PROBEFunc:EXTUnits Sets the unit of measurement for the ex- ternal attenuator of the specified channel Or returns the user--specified unit of measurement for the external attenuator CH<x>:SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale of the specified channel CH<x>:TERmination Sets channel input termination MATH<x>:POSition Sets or returns the vertical position for math display...
Page 73 Data Formats Acquired waveform data uses eight or more bits to represent each data point. The number of bits used depends on the acquisition mode speci- fied when you acquired the data. Data acquired in SAMple or ENVe- lope mode uses eight bits per waveform data point. Data acquired in AVERage mode uses up to 14 bits per point.
Page 74 When transferring data from the instrument, you must specify the first and last data points in the waveform record. Setting DATa:STARt to 1 and DATa:STOP to the record length will always return the entire wa- veform. Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation The DATa:SOUrce command specifies the waveform source when transferring a waveform from the instrument.
Page 75 Command Description CURVe The command format transfers waveform data to the instrument (reference memory location specified by DATa:DESTination) The query format transfers waveform data from instrument specified by the DATa:SOUrce command DATa Sets the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe? Com- mand Or returns the format and location of the wave-...
Page 76 WFMInpre:XZEro Sets or returns the (sub--sample) time be- tween the trigger sample and the occurrence of the actual incoming waveform trigger WFMInpre:YMUlt Sets or returns the vertical scale factor, per digitizing level, of the incoming waveform points WFMInpre:YOFf Sets or returns the vertical position of the in- coming waveform in digitizing levels WFMInpre:YUNit Sets or returns the vertical units of the incom-...
Page 77: Zoom Command Group
Zoom Command Group Zoom commands let you expand and position the waveform display horizontally and vertically, without changing the time base or vertical settings. You can specify up to four zoom areas. You can also specify a zoomed waveform as a zoom source, which enables you to zoom in on a zoomed waveform.
Page 78: Commands Listed In Alphabetical Order
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order *CAL? Description This query- -only command instructs the digitizing oscilloscope to per- form signal path compensation and return its calibration status. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Calibration from the Utilities menu and then clicking the Calibrate button. Note: The self- -calibration can take several minutes to respond.
Page 79: Cls
*CLS Description This command (no query form) clears the following: Event Queue Standard Event Status Register Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit) If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output Queue and MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared. MAV indicates that information is in the output queue.
Page 80: Ddt
*DDT Description This command allows you to specify a command or a list of commands that are executed when the instrument receives a *TRG command or the GET GPIB interface message. Define Device Trigger (*DDT) is a special alias that the *TRG command uses. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands...
Page 81: Ese
*ESE Description This command sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Reg- ister (ESER). The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register (STB). For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers. Group Status and Error Related Commands...
Page 82: Esr
*ESR? Description This query- -only command returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register (SESR). *ESR? also clears the SESR (since reading the SESR clears it). For a more detailed discussion of the use of these reg- isters, see Registers. Group Status and Error Related Commands...
Page 83: Idn
This query- -only command returns the instrument identification code. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands Syntax IDN? Example *IDN? This query might return :TEKTRONIX,TDS5054B,10000001,CF:91.1CT FV:01.00.912, indicating the instrument model number, serial number, configured number, and firmware version number. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 63 --...
Page 84: Lrn
*LRN? Description This query- -only command returns the commands that list the instru- ment settings (except for configuration information for the calibration values), allowing you to record or ”learn” the current instrument set- tings. You can use these commands to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the *LRN? query.
Page 85: Opc
*OPC Description This command generates the operation complete message in the Stan- dard Event Status Register (SESR) when all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete. The *OPC? query places the ASCII character ”1” into the output queue when all such OPC com- mands are complete.
Page 86: Opt
*OPT? Description This query- -only command returns a list of the options installed in your instrument. Group Status and Error Syntax *OPT? Example *OPT? This query might return :3M:16 Meg Max 4M/CH TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 66 --...
Page 87: Psc
*PSC Description This command sets and queries the power- -on status flag that controls the automatic power- -on handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When *PSC is true, the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power- -on. When *PSC is false, the current values in the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and are re- stored at power- -on.
Page 88: Pud
*PUD Description This command sets or queries a string of Protected User Data. This data is protected by the PASSWord command. You can modify it only by first entering the correct password. This password is not necessary to query the data. Group Status and Error Related Commands...
Page 89: Rcl
*RCL Description This command (no query form) restores the state of the instrument from a copy of the settings stored in memory (The settings are stored using the *SAV command). If ’factory’ is referenced (by specifying ’0’), the factory default values will be restored. This command is equivalent to RECAll:SETup and performs the same function as selecting Recall from the File menu, and then pressing the Setup button.
Page 90: Rst
*RST Description This command (no query form) resets the instrument to the factory de- fault settings. The *RST command does not alter the following: The state of the IEEE Std 488.1- -1987 interface The selected IEEE Std 488.1- -1987 address of the instrument Calibration data that affect device specifications The Output Queue The Service Request Enable Register setting...
Page 91: Sav
*SAV Description This command (no query form) stores the state of the instrument to a specified memory location. You can later use the *RCL command to restore the instrument to this saved state. \ This command is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu, and then pressing the Setup button.
Page 92: Sds
*SDS Description This command (no query form) changes the specified setup to reference the factory setup instead of the specific user setup slot. The content of the setup slot is unchanged, but the data will no longer be accessible to you.
Page 93: Sre
*SRE Description The *SRE (Service Request Enable) command sets and queries the bits in the Service Request Enable Register. For more information, refer to Registers. Group Status and Error Related Commands *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory, *STB? Syntax 1 *SRE <NR1>...
Page 94: Stb
*STB? Description The *STB? (Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the Status Byte Register (SBR) using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. For more information, refer to Registers. Group Status and Error Related Commands *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory, *SRE? Syntax *STB? Returns...
Page 95: Trg
*TRG Description This command (no query form) performs the group execute trigger on commands defined by *DDT. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands *DDT Syntax *TRG Example *TRG This command immediately executes all commands that have been de- fined by *DDT. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 75 --...
Page 96: Tst
*TST? Description This query- -only command tests (self- -test) the GPIB interface and re- turns a 0. Group Miscellaneous Syntax *TST? Example *TST? This query always returns 0. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 76 --...
Page 97: Wai
*WAI Description The *WAI (Wait) command (no query form) prevents the instrument from executing further commands or queries until all pending com- mands that generate an OPC message are complete. This command al- lows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your ap- plication program.
Page 98: Acquire:mode
ACQuire:MODe Description This command sets or queries the acquisition mode of the instrument. This affects all live waveforms. This command is equivalent to select- ing Horizontal/Acquisition from the Horiz/Acq menu, and then choos- ing the desired mode from the Acquisition Mode group box. Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals.
Page 99 form acquisition. The number of samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the number of data values that compose the aver- age. H AVErage Specifies averaging mode, in which the resulting waveform shows an average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform ac- quisitions.
Page 100: Acquire:numacq
ACQuire:NUMACq? Description This query- -only command returns the number of waveform acquisi- tions that have occurred since starting acquisition with the AC- Quire:STATE RUN command. This value is reset to zero when any acquisition, horizontal, or vertical arguments that affect the waveform are changed.
Page 101: Acquire:numavg
ACQuire:NUMAVg Description This command sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform. Use the ACQuire:MODe com- mand to enable the Average mode. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu, selecting the Acquisition tab, and choosing Average from the Acquisi- tion Mode group box.
Page 102: Acquire:numenv
ACQuire:NUMEnv Description This command sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an envelope waveform. Sending this command is equiva- lent to setting the # of Wfms in the Acquisition Setup menu when En- velope Acquisition mode is selected. Group Acquisition Syntax 1...
Page 103: Acquire:numsamples
ACQuire:NUMSAMples Description This command sets or queries the minimum number of acquired sam- ples that make up a waveform database (WfmDB) waveform for single sequence mode and Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test. This is equivalent to setting the Waverform Database Samples in the Acquisition Mode side menu.
Page 104: Acquire:samplingmode
ACQuire:SAMPlingmode Description This command sets or queries the sampling mode. Group Acquisition Syntax 1 ACQuire:SAMPlingmode{RT|IT|ET} Syntax 2 ACQuire:SAMPlingmode? Arguments H RT This argument sets the sampling mode to real time only. H IT This argument sets the sampling mode to interpolation allowed. H ET This argument sets the sampling mode to equivalent time allowed.
Page 105 Example 1 ACQuire:NUMSAMples 5000 This command specifies that 5000 samples will be acquired in WfmDB mode for single sequence mode and Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test. Example 2 ACQuire:NUMSAMples? This command might return :ACQUIRE:NUMSAMples 10000 indicating that there are 10,000 samples to be acquired in WfmDB mode for single sequence and Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test.
Page 106: Acquire:state
ACQuire:STATE Description This command starts or stops acquisitions. When state is set to ON or RUN, a new acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition was a single acquisition sequence, a new single sequence acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition was continuous, a new continuous ac- quisition will be started.
Page 107 Example 1 ACQuire:STATE RUN This command starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the count of the number of acquisitions. Example 2 ACQuire:STATE? This query might return :ACQUIRE:STATE indicating that the acquisition is stopped. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 87 --...
Page 108: Acquire:stopafter
ACQuire:STOPAfter Description This command sets or queries whether the instrument continually ac- quires acquisitions or acquires a single sequence. This command is equivalent to pressing SINGLE from the front panel. Group Acquisition Related Commands ACQuire:STATE Syntax 1 ACQuire:STOPAfter {RUNSTop|SEQuence} Syntax 2 ACQuire:STOPAfter? Arguments RUNSTop...
Page 109: Acquire
ACQuire? Description This query- -only command returns the following current acquisition parameters: Stop after Acquisition state Mode Number of envelopes Number of averages Repetitive signals Group Acquisition Related Commands ACQuire:MODe, ACQuire:NUMACq, ACQuire:NUMAVg, AC- Quire:NUMenv, ACQuire:STOPAfter Syntax ACQuire? Example ACQuire? This query might return the following string for the current acquisition parameters: :ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAM- PLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;NUMSAMPLES 16000;SAM-...
Page 110: Alias
ALIas Description This command sets or queries the state of alias functionality. Group Alias Related Commands ALIas:STATE Syntax 1 ALIas {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 ALIas? Arguments H OFF This turns Alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when ALIas:STATE is off, a command error (102) will be generated. H ON This turns Alias expansion on.
Page 111: Alias:catalog
ALIas:CATalog? Description This query- -only command returns a list of the currently defined alias labels, separated by commas. If no aliases are defined, the query returns the string ””. Group Alias Syntax ALIas:CATalog? Example ALIas:CATalog? This query might return the string :ALIAS:CATALOG ”SETUP1”,”TESTMENU1”,”DEFAULT”...
Page 112: Alias:define
ALIas:DEFine Description This command assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias la- bel. These messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command or query, provided that ALIas:STATE has been turned on. The query form of this command returns the definitions of a selected alias.
Page 113 Example 2 ALIas:DEFine? ”ST1” This command returns :ALIAS:DEFINE ”ST1”,#246 :RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 93 --...
Page 114: Alias:delete
ALIas:DELEte Description This command removes a specified alias and is identical to ALIas:DE- LEte:NAMe. An error message is generated if the named alias does not exist. Group Alias Related Commands *ESR?, ALIas:DELEte:ALL Syntax ALIas:DELEte <Qstring> Argument H <Qstring> This is the name of the alias to be removed. Using ALIas:DELEte without specifying an alias causes an execution error.
Page 115: Alias:delete:all
ALIas:DELEte:ALL Description This command deletes all existing aliases. Group Alias Related Commands ALIas:DELEte, ALIas:DELEte:NAMe Syntax ALIas:DELEte:ALL Example ALIas:DELEte:ALL This command deletes all existing aliases. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 95 --...
Page 116: Alias:delete:name
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe Description This command removes a specified alias. An error message is generated if the named alias does not exist. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte. Group Alias Syntax ALIas:DELEte:NAMe <Qstring> Argument H <Qstring> This is the name of the alias to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte:NAMe without specifying an alias causes an exception error.
Page 117: Alias:state
ALIas:STATE Description This command turns aliases on or off and is identical to the ALIas com- mand. The query form of this command returns the state of the aliases. Group Alias Syntax 1 ALIas:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 ALIas:STATE? Arguments H OFF This turns alias expansion off.
Page 118: Allev
ALLEV? Description This query- -only command prompts the instrument to return all events and their messages (delimited by commas), and removes the returned events from the Event Queue. Use the *ESR? query to enable the events to be returned. This command is similar to repeatedly sending *EVMsg? queries to the instrument.
Page 119: Autoset
AUTOSet Description This command (no query format) sets the vertical, horizontal, and trig- ger controls of the instrument to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform. (To autoset a video waveform, the video trigger must be set to video standard, not custom.) This is equivalent to press- ing the front- -panel AUTOSET button.
Page 120: Auxout:source
AUXout:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries the trigger source at the BNC connection. This command is equivalent to selecting AUX OUT Configuration from the Utilities menu and then selecting the desired Configuration setting. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands AUXout? Syntax 1 AUXout:SOUrce {ATRIGger|BTRIGger} Syntax 2 AUXout:SOUrce?
Page 121: Auxout
AUXout? Description This query- -only command returns the auxiliary output setup and is equivalent to selecting External Signals… from the Utilities menu, and then viewing the current settings for the AUX OUT Configuration. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands AUXout:SOUrce Syntax AUXout? Example AUXout? This query might return...
Page 122: Beli
BELI Description This command was previously used to beep an audio indicator and is provided for backward compatibility. Group Miscellaneous Syntax BEL1 Example BEL1 This command is accepted but does nothing. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 102 --...
Page 123: Busy
BUSY? Description This query- -only command returns the status of the instrument. This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application program. Group Status and Error Related Commands *OPC, *WAI Syntax BUSY? Returns <NR1> If 0 is returned, it means that the instrument is not busy processing a command whose execution time is extensive.
Page 124: Cal
CAL? Description This query- -only command returns the status of instrument calibration, including internal signal path calibration, factory calibration, and probe calibration. This query also returns the time until notification when the next factory calibration is due. Refer to the service manual for factory calibration command descriptions.
Page 125: Calibrate:calprobe:ch
CALibrate:CALProbe:CH<x>? Description This query- -only command instructs the instrument to perform a probe calibration for the selected channel and returns the calibration status. The Channel <x> range is 1 through 4. This command is equivalent to selecting Probe Cal from the Vertical menu. You must warm up the in- strument for at least 20 minutes before running this command.

Page 126: Calibrate:internal
CALibrate:INTERNal Description This command (no query form) starts the internal signal path calibra- tion (SPC) of the instrument. You can use the CALibrate:INTER- Nal:STATus? query to return the current status of the internal signal path calibration of the instrument. Group Calibration Related Commands CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Page 127: Calibrate:internal:start
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt Description This command (no query form) starts the internal signal path calibra- tion (SPC) of the instrument. This command is the same as the CALi- brate:INTERNal command. You can use the CALibrate:INTER- Nal:STATus? query to return the current status of the internal signal path calibration of the instrument.
Page 128: Calibrate:internal:status
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? Description This query- -only command returns the current status of the instrument internal signal path calibration for the last SPC operation. Group Calibration Related Commands *CAL? Syntax CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? Returns This query will return one of the following: H INIT Indicatesthe instrument has not had internal signal path calibration run.
Page 129: Calibrate:probestate:ch
CALibrate:PROBEstate:CH<x>? Description This query- -only command returns the probe calibration status for the probe of the selected channel, 1 through 4. Group Calibration Related Commands CH<x>:PROBECal? Syntax CALibrate:PROBEstate:CH<x>? Returns H -1 Indicating the probe calibration failed for the selected channel. Indicating the probe calibration passed for the selected channel.

Page 130: Calibrate:results:spc
CALibrate:RESults:SPC? Description This query- -only command returns the results of the last SPC operation. However, this query does not cause an SPC to be run. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Calibration from the Utilities menu. Group Calibration Related Commands *CAL? Syntax CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Page 131: Calibrate:results
CALibrate:RESults? Description This query- -only command returns the status of internal and factory calibrations, without performing any calibration operations. The results returned do not include the calibration status of attached probes. The CALibration:RESults? query is intended to support GO/NoGO testing of the oscilloscope calibration readiness: all returned results should in- dicate PASS status if the instrument is ”fit for duty”.
Page 132: Ch
CH<x>? Description This query- -only command returns the vertical parameters for the speci- fied channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- - channel instruments.

Page 133: Ch:Bandwidth
CH<x>:BANdwidth Description This command sets or queries the selectable low- -pass bandwidth limit filter of the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 134 Example 1 CH1:BANdwidth TWEnty This command sets the bandwidth of channel 1 to 20 MHz. Example 2 CH2:BANdwidth? For TDS5052B and TDS5054B instruments, this query might return :CH2:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+06 indicating that there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 2. For TDS5104 instruments, this query might return :CH2:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+09 indicating that there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 2.
Page 135: Ch:Coupling
CH<x>:COUPling Description This command sets or queries the input attenuator coupling setting for the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 136: Ch:Deskew
CH<x>:DESKew Description This command sets or queries the deskew time for the specified chan- nel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 137: Ch:Invert
CH<x>:INVert Description This command sets or queries the invert function for the specified chan- nel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 138: Ch:Label:name
CH<x>:LABel:NAMe Description This command sets or queries the label attached to the displayed wave- form for the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 139: Ch:Label:xpos
CH<x>:LABel:XPOS Description This command sets or queries the X screen offset at which the label (attached to the displayed waveform of the specified channel) is dis- played, relative to the left edge of the screen. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel in- struments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 140: Ch:Label:ypos
CH<x>:LABel:YPOS Description This command sets or queries the Y screen offset at which the label (attached to the displayed waveform of the specified channel) is dis- played, relative to the top edge of the screen. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel in- struments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 141: Ch:Offset
CH<x>:OFFSet Description This command sets or queries the vertical offset for the specified chan- nel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 142 Argument H <NR3> This is the offset value for the specified channel. Example 1 CH3:OFFSet 2.0E-3 This command sets the offset for channel 3 to 2 mV. Example 2 CH4:OFFSet? This query might return :CH4:OFFSET 1.0000E-03 indicating that the offset for channel 4 is set to 1 mV. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 122 --...
Page 143: Ch:Position
CH<x>:POSition Description This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 144: Ch:Probecal
CH<x>:PROBECal? Description This query- -only command returns the probe calibration state for the selected channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 145: Ch:Probe:gain
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN? Description This query- -only command returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 146: Ch:Probe:id:sernumber
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber? Description This query- -only command returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 147: Ch:Probe:id:type
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe? Description This query- -only command returns the type of probe that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 148: Ch:Probe:id
CH<x>:PRObe:ID? Description This query- -only command returns the type and serial of the probe that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 149: Ch:Probe:resistance
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance? Description This query- -only command returns the resistance factor of the probe that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 150: Ch:Probe:units
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts? Description This query- -only command returns a string describing the units of mea- sure for the probe attached to the specified channel. The channel is spe- cified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 151: Ch:Probefunc:extatten
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten Description This command is used to specify the input- -output ratio, of external at- tenuation or gain, between the signal and the instrument input channels. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments, or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instru- ments.
Page 152 Example 2 CH2:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten? This query might return :CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 1.0000E+00 indicating that the probe attached to channel 2 is connected directly to the user’s signal. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 132 --...
Page 153: Ch:Probefunc:extdbatten
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten Description Use this command to specify the input- -output ratio (expressed in deci- bel units) of external attenuation or gain between the signal and the instrument input channels. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments, or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instru- ments.
Page 154: Ch:Probefunc:extunits
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits Description This command sets the unit of measurement for the external attenuator of the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 155: Ch:Probe
CH<x>:PRObe? Description This query- -only command returns all information concerning the probe that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments. Group Vertical Related Commands...
Page 156: Ch:Scale
CH<x>:SCAle Description This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified chan- nel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 157 Example 2 CH2:SCAle? This query might return :CH2:SCALE 1.0000E+00 indicating that the current scale setting of channel 2 is 1 V per division. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 137 --...
Page 158: Ch:Termination
CH<x>:TERmination Description This command sets the connected/disconnected status of a 50 Ù resis- tor, which may be connected between the specified channel’s coupled input and instrument ground. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 159: Cmdbatch
CMDBatch Description This command sets or queries the state of command batching. By batching commands, database transactions can be optimized, increasing command throughput. Also, batching allows for ALL commands in an individual batch to be order independent and accomplish the same re- sult as if the commands were coupled.
Page 160: Cursor:function
CURSor:FUNCtion Description This command sets or queries the cursor type. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Cursor Type from the Cursors menu, and then choosing from the drop- -down list. Group Cursor Related Commands CURSor:STAte Syntax 1 CURSor:FUNCtion {OFF|HBArs|VBArs|SCREEN|WAVE- form} Syntax 2 CURSor:FUNCtion?
Page 161 Example 2 CURSOR:FUNCtion? This query might return :CURSor:FUNCtion HBArs indicating that the horizontal bar cursors are currently selected. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 141 --...
Page 162: Cursor:hbars
CURSor:HBArs? Description This query- -only command returns the current settings for the horizontal bar cursors. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:HBArs? Example CURSor:HBArs? This command might return the horizontal bar setting as :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 320.0000E-03;POSI- TION2-320.0000E-03;UNITS BASE TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 142 --...
Page 163: Cursor:hbars:delta
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? Description This query- -only command returns the vertical difference between the two horizontal bar cursors. Group Cursor Related Command CURSor:HBArs:UNIts? Syntax CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? Returns A floating point value with an exponent. Example CURSOR:HBArs:DELTa? This command might return :CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 5.0800E+00 indicating that the voltage difference between the two cursors is 5.08 V. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 143 --...
Page 164: Cursor:hbars:position
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> Description This command sets or queries the horizontal bar cursor position relative to ground, which is expressed in vertical units (usually volts). The cur- sor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. This command is the equiva- lent to selecting Cursor Position from the Cursors menu, selecting the H Bars Cursor Type, and then viewing or editing the desired cursor posi- tion.

Page 165: Cursor:hbars:units
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts? Description This query- -only command returns the units for the horizontal bar cur- sors. This query always returns BASE, indicating that the units for the hori- zontal bar cursors are those of the base waveform to which they were assigned.
Page 166: Cursor:linestyle
CURSor:LINESTyle Description This command sets or queries the cursors line style used when cursors are displayed. Group Cursor Syntax 1 CURSor:LINESTyle {SOLID|DASHed} Syntax 2 CURSor:LINESTyle? Arguments H SOLID Displays the cursors as solid lines. H DASHed Displays the cursors as dashed lines. Example 1 CURsor:LINESTyle SOLID This command displays the cursors as solid lines.
Page 167: Cursor:mode
CURSor:MODe Description This command sets or queries whether the two cursors move together in unison or separately. This command is the equivalent of selecting Cur- sor Mode from the Cursors menu, and then choosing from the drop- - down list. Group Cursor Syntax 1...
Page 168: Cursor:screen:style
CURSor:SCREEN:STYle Description This command sets or queries the cursor type for Screen mode. Group Cursor Syntax 1 CURSor:SCREEN:STYle {LINE_X|LINES|X} Syntax 2 CURSor:SCREEN:STYle? Arguments H LINE_X Specifies the cursor style to be a line with superimposed X. H LINES Specifies the cursor style to be a line. Specifies the cursor style to be an X.
Page 169: Cursor:source
CURSor:SOUrce<x> Description This command sets or queries the source(s) for the currently selected cursor type (H Bars, V Bars, Waveform, or Screen). The cursor is speci- fied by x, which can be 1 or 2. If the cursor is not specified, it defaults to cursor 1.

Page 170 Example 2 CURSor:SOUrce1? This query might return :CURSOR:SOURCE1 CH2 indicating that the Cursor1 source is channel 2. Example 3 CURSor:SOUrce? This query might return :CURSOR:SOURCE1 CH2 indicating that the Cursor1 source is channel 2. If you do not specify the cursor, cursor 1 is returned as the source. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 150 --...
Page 171: Cursor:state
CURSor:STATE Description This command sets or queries the state of cursors. Note that setting the cursor state does not modify the cursor type. This command is equivalent to pressing the CURSOR button on the front panel. Group Cursor Related Commands CURSor:FUNCtion OFF Syntax 1 CURSor:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}...
Page 172: Cursor:vbars
CURSor:VBArs Description This command returns the current settings for the vertical bar cursors or forces them to snap to positions specified by the DATA:START and DATA:STOP commands. Group Cursor Related Commands DATA:START, DATA:STOP Syntax 1 CURSor:VBArs? Returns the units and positions of the vertical bar cursors. Syntax 2 CURSor:VBArs SNAp Argument...
Page 173: Cursor:vbars:delta
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? Description This query- -only command returns the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors. The units are specified by the CUR- Sor:VBArs:UNIts command. The position can appear in units of Base or 1/Base. Group Cursor Related Commands CURSor:VBArs:UNIts Syntax CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? Returns...
Page 174: Cursor:vbars:position
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> Description This command sets or queries the horizontal position for vertical bar cursors. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. Values are with respect to trigger position or the zero reference point for the desig- nated waveform (if horizontal units are not set to time).

Page 175: Cursor:vbars:units
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts Description This command sets or queries the units for the vertical bar cursors. Group Cursor Syntax 1 CURSor:VBArs:UNIts {SEConds|HERtz} Syntax 2 CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? Arguments H SECOnds Sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the time domain (sec- onds). H HERtz Sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the frequency domain (hertz).
Page 176: Cursor:waveform:hdelta
CURSor:WAVEform:HDELTA? Description This query- -only command returns the horizontal difference between the waveform cursors. This is the absolute value of the horizontal posi- tion of the first cursor minus the horizontal position of the second cur- sor. This is equivalent to the waveform delta- -time readout value. Group Cursor Syntax...
Page 177: Cursor:waveform:hpos
CURSor:WAVEform:HPOS<x>? Description This query- -only command returns the position of the specified wave- form cursor. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. This cor- responds to the v1 or v2 (cursor 1 or cursor 2) cursor readout. Group Cursor Syntax...

Page 178: Cursor:waveform:position
CURSor:WAVEform:POSition<x> Description This command sets or queries the position of a waveform cursor, which is constrained to be visible in the selected time base. (Use the CUR- Sor:FUNCtion command to set the cursor function to Waveform.) The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. This is equivalent to set- ting a value in the Position control in the Cursor1 or Cursor2 sections of the Cursor Setup dialog box (when Waveform is selected in the Func- tion section).

Page 179: Cursor:waveform:source
CURSor:WAVEform:SOUrce<x> Description This command sets or queries the source for a waveform cursor. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. Group Cursor Syntax 1 CURSor:WAVEform:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>} Syntax 2 CURSor:SOUrce? Arguments H CH<x> Sets an input channel waveform as the cursor source. The valid chan- nel waveform range is from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel- -instruments.

Page 180: Cursor:waveform:style
CURSor:WAVEform:STYle Description This command sets or queries the cursor type for Waveform mode. Group Cursor Syntax 1 CURSor:WAVEform:STYle {LINE_X|LINES|X} Syntax 2 CURSor:WAVEform:STYle? Arguments H LINE_X Specifies the cursor style to be a line with superimposed X. H LINES Specifies the cursor style to be a line. Specifies the cursor style to be an X.
Page 181: Cursor:waveform:units
CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts Description This command sets or queries the units for waveform cursors. Group Cursor Syntax 1 CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts BASe Syntax 2 CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts? Arguments H BASe Sets cursor units to base. Example 1 CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts BASe This command sets the waveform cursor units to base. Example 2 CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts? This query might return...
Page 182: Cursor:waveform:vdelta
CURSor:WAVEform:VDELTA? Description This query- -only command returns the vertical difference between the waveform cursors. This is the absolute value of the vertical position of the first cursor minus the vertical position of the second cursor. This is equivalent to the waveform delta- -voltage readout value. Group Cursor Syntax...
Page 183: Cursor:waveform
CURSor:WAVEform Description This command returns the current settings for the waveform cursors or forces them to snap to positions specified by the DATA:START and DATA:STOP commands. Group Cursor Related Commands DATA:START, DATA:STOP Syntax 1 CURSor:WAVEform? Returns the units and positions of the waveform cursors. Syntax 2 CURSor:WAVEform SNAp Argument...
Page 184: Cursor:xy:proddelta
CURSor:XY:PRODDELta? Description This query- -only command returns the product of the difference be- tween the cursors X positions and Y positions when the CUR- Sor:XY:READOUT is set to PRODuct. The ∆X x ∆Y value is calcu- lated as (Cursor 2 X – Cursor 1 X) X (Cursor 2 Y – Cursor 1 Y). Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to PRODuct.
Page 185: Cursor:xy:product
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT<x>? Description This query- -only command returns the product of the X and Y positions for the specified cursor when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to PRODuct. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to PRODuct.

Page 186: Cursor:xy:radius
CURSor:XY:RADIUS<x>? Description This query- -only command returns the radius of the specified cursor when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to POLARCoord. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to POLARCoord.

Page 187: Cursor:xy:ratdelta
CURSor:XY:RATDELta? Description This query- -only command returns ratio of the difference between the cursors X position and Y position (∆Y ÷ ∆X) when the CUR- Sor:XY:READOUT is set to RATio. The ratio is calculated as (Cursor 2 Y – Cursor 1 Y) ÷ (Cursor 2 X – Cursor 1 X). Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to RATio.
Page 188: Cursor:xy:ratio
CURSor:XY:RATIO<x>? Description This query- -only command returns ratio the of the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) position for the specified cursor when the CUR- Sor:XY:READOUT is set to RATio. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. The ratio is calculated as Y ÷ X. Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to RATio.

Page 189: Cursor:xy:rdelta
CURSor:XY:RDELta? Description This query- -only command returns the delta radius (∆r) value when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to POLARCoord. Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to POLARCoord. If the readout is set other than polar coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.
Page 190: Cursor:xy:readout
CURSor:XY:READOUT Description This command sets or queries the XY cursor readout (available when DISplay:FORMat is set to XY). Group Cursor Related Commands DISplay:FORMat Syntax 1 CURSor:XY:READOUT {RECTangular|POLAR- Coord|PRODuct|RATio} Syntax 2 CURSor:XY:READOUT? Arguments H RECTangular Displays the following values: X1, X2, ∆X, Y1, Y2, ∆Y, t1, t2, ∆t. H POLARCoord Displays the following values: r1, r2, ∆r, θ1, θ2, ∆θ, t1, t2, ∆t.
Page 191: Cursor:xy:rectx
CURSor:XY:RECTX<x> Description This command sets or queries the X cursor position in rectangular coor- dinates. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to RECTangular. If the readout is set other than rectangular coordi- nates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.

Page 192: Cursor:xy:recty
CURSor:XY:RECTY<x> Description This command sets or queries the Y cursor position in rectangular coor- dinates. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to RECTangular. If the readout is set to other than rectangular coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is re- turned: 99.1000E+36.

Page 193: Cursor:xy:thdelta
CURSor:XY:THDELta? Description This query- -only command returns the XY cursor angle delta in polar coordinates. Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to POLARCoord. If the readout is set other than polar coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.
Page 194: Cursor:xy:theta
CURSor:XY:THETA<x>? Description This query- -only command returns the XY cursor angle in polar coordi- nates. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to POLARCoord. If the readout is set other than polar coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.

Page 195: Cursor:xy:xdelta
CURSor:XY:XDELta? Description This query- -only command returns the XY cursor X delta value in rec- tangular coordinates. Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to RECTangular. If the readout is set to other than rectangular coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is re- turned: 99.1000E+36.
Page 196: Cursor:xy:ydelta
CURSor:XY:YDELta? Description This query- -only command returns the XY cursor Y delta value in rec- tangular coordinates. Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to RECTangular. If the readout is set to other than rectangular coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is re- turned: 99.1000E+36.
Page 197: Cursor:xy
CURSor:XY? Description This query- -only command returns all of the XY cursor parameters. Note: The values returned for all XY cursor readouts, that do not per- tain to the current CURSor:XY:READOUT setting, are returned as the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number): 99.1000E+36. Group Cursor Syntax...
Page 198: Cursor
CURSor? Description This query- -only command returns all of the current cursor settings. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor? Example: CURSOR? This query might return the following as the current cursor settings: :CURSOR:STATE 1;FUNCTION VBARS;LINESTYLE SOL- ID;MODE INDEPENDENT;SOURCE1 CH1; SOURCE2 CH1;SCREEN:STYLE LINES; :CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 -1.6000E-6;POSITION2 1.6000E-6;...
Page 199 CURVe Description This command transfers waveform data to and from the instrument. Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform preamble that contains information such as data format and scale. The CURVe? query transfers data from the instrument. The data source is specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
Page 200 Example 1 CURVe? This query with ASCII encoding, start and stop of 1 and 10 respective- ly, and a width set to 1 might return :CURVE 61,62,61,60,60,- -59,- -59,- -58,- -58,- -59 Note: Curve data is transferred from the instrument asynchronously and, dependent upon the length of the curve record, such transfers can require several seconds to complete.
Page 201: Curve Data
DATa Description This command sets or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe command. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands CURVe, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, DATa:ENCdg SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? Syntax 1 DATa {INIT|SNAp} Syntax 2 DATa? Argument...
Page 202: Data:destination
DATa:DESTination Description This command sets or queries the reference memory location for stor- ing waveform data that is transferred into the instrument by the CURVe command. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands CURVe Syntax 1 DATa:DESTination REF<x> Syntax 2 DATa:DESTination? Argument H REF<x>...
Page 203: Data:encdg
DATa:ENCdg Description This command sets or queries the format of outgoing waveform data. This command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or. Setting the DATa:ENGdg value causes the corresponding WFMOutpre values to be updated and visa versa. Note: Values are constrained (for outbound data) to the format of the data specified by DATa:SOUrce.
Page 204 H•RPBinary This specifies the positive integer data- -point representation, with the most significant byte transferred first. When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range from 0 through 255. When :BYT_Nr is 2, the range is from 0 to 65,535. When :BYT_Nr is 8, then the wa- veform being queried has been set to Fast Acquisition mode.
Page 205 Example 1 DATa:ENCdg? This query might return :DATa:ENCDG SRPBINARY for the format of the outgoing waveform data. Example 2 DATa:ENGdg RPBinary This command sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 185 --...
Page 206: Data:source
DATa:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries the location of waveform data that is transferred from the instrument by the CURVe? Query. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands CURVe? Syntax 1 DATa:SOUrce <wfm>[<,><wfm>] Syntax 2 DATa:SOUrce? Argument H•<wfm> This is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from the instrument to the controller.
Page 207: Data:start
DATa:STARt Description This command sets or queries the starting data point for waveform transfer. This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the instrument. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands CURVe, DATa, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FI- LEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt, WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_FR? Syntax 1 DATa:STARt <NR1>...
Page 208: Data:stop
DATa:STOP Description This command sets or queries the last data point that will be transferred when using the CURVe? query. This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to the controller. Changes to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the data:stop value.
Page 209 Example 1 DATa:STOP? This query might return :DATA:STOP 14900 indicating that 14900 is the last waveform data point that will be trans- ferred. Example 2 DATa:STOP 15000 This command specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 15000. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 189 --...
Page 210: Date
DATE Description This command sets or queries the date that the instrument can display. This command is equivalent to selecting Set Date & Time from the Uti- lities menu and then setting the fields in the Date group box. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands TIME...
Page 211: Delete:setup
DELEte:SETUp Description This command (no query form) changes the setup to reference the fac- tory setup instead of the specific user setup slot. The content of the set- up slot is unchanged, but the data will no longer be accessible to you. This command is equivalent to selecting Delete from the File menu, and then clicking the specific setup you want to delete (user setups are shown as Setup- -User and are ordered in the list from 1 through 10, if...
Page 212: Delete:waveform
DELEte:WAVEform Description This command (no query form) deletes one or all stored reference wa- veforms from memory. This command is equivalent to selecting Delete from the File menu, and then choosing the reference waveform you want to delete; choosing All Refs deletes all of the reference waveforms. Group Save and Recall Related Commands...
Page 213: Dese
DESE Description This command sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status En- able Register (DESER). The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to the Standard Event Status Register (SESR), and entered into the Event Queue. For a more detailed discus- sion of the use of these registers, see Registers.
Page 214: Diag:control:halt
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT Description This command (no query form) determines whether the next execution of diagnostics will stop on the first diagnostic failure that occurs or will execute the selected set of diagnostic functions. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then enabling Halt on Fail.
Page 215: Diag:control:loop
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP Description This command (no query form) determines whether the next execution of diagnostics executes once or continuously loops on the selected set of diagnostics (assuming the halt control is set to off using the DIAg:CONTROL:HALT command or that the halt control is set to ON but no failures occur).
Page 216: Diag:execute
DIAg:EXECUTE Description This command (no query form) starts the execution of the currently selected set of diagnostics. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then pressing Run. Group Diagnostics Related Commands DIAg:STATE Syntax DIAg:EXECUTE Example DIAg:EXECUTE This command starts the execution of the entire set of diagnostics.
Page 217: Diag:item
DIAg:ITEM? Description This query- -only command returns the diagnostics settings. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utili- ties menu, and then reviewing the diagnostics settings. This query- -only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress.
Page 218: Diag:item:failures
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES? Description This query- -only command returns the total number of failures. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status. This query- -only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress.
Page 219: Diag:item:name
DIAg:ITEM:NAMe? Description This query- -only command returns the name of the selected menu item. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Subsystem, Area and Test settings. This query- -only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress.
Page 220: Diag:item:result
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? Description This query- -only command returns the result from the last execution of the item. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnos- tics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status. This query- -only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress.
Page 221: Diag:item:subitems
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS? Description This query- -only command returns the number of sub- -items associated with the item. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu, choosing the Subsystem, Area or Test setting and then reviewing the resulting sub- -items. This query- -only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress.
Page 222: Diag:level
DIAg:LEVEL Description This command sets or returns the currently selected level of diagnostic test hierarchy. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status. Group Diagnostics Syntax 1 DIAg:LEVEL (SUBSYS|AREA|TEST} Syntax 2 DIAg:LEVEL? Arguments H SUBSYS...
Page 223: Diag:loops
DIAg:LOOPS? Description This query- -only command returns the number of times that the selected diagnostics set was completed during the last diagnostic execution. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Elapsed Loops. This query- -only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress.
Page 224: Diag:name
DIAg:NAMe? Description This query- -only command returns the names of the subsystem, area, and test of the current diagnostic test. This command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress. Group Diagnostics Related Commands DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST? Syntax DIAg:NAMe? Example DIAg:NAMe? This query might return...
Page 225: Diag:name:area
DIAg:NAMe:AREA? Description This query- -only command returns the selected area of the current diag- nostic test. There are three levels of diagnostic test hierarchy: subsys- tem, area and test. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
Page 226: Diag:name:subsys
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS? Description This query- -only command returns the subsystem of the current diag- nostic test. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diag- nostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Sta- tus. This query- -only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress.
Page 227: Diag:name:test
DIAg:NAMe:TEST? Description This query- -only command returns the name of the current diagnostic test. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status. This query- -only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress.
Page 228: Diag:numitems
DIAg:NUMITEMS? Description This query- -only command returns the number of items on the currently selected level of test hierarchy, which ranges from 1 through 15. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status. This query- -only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress.
Page 229: Diag:results
DIAg:RESULts? Description This query- -only command returns an abbreviated status about the re- sults of the last diagnostic (or test) execution. For a more explanatory status message, use the DIAg:RESULts:VERBose? query. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utili- ties menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
Page 230: Diag:results:verbose
DIAg:RESULts:VERBose? Description This query- -only command returns a more explanatory message about the results of the last diagnostic (or test) execution than the DIAg:RE- SUlts? query. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
Page 231: Diag:select:all
DIAg:SELect:ALL Description This command (no query form) selects all available diagnostics. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then choosing ALL from the Subsystem, Area and Test pull- -down lists. Group Diagnostics Related Commands DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST?, DIAg:EXECUTE Syntax...
Page 232: Diag:select:area
DIAg:SELect:AREA Description This command (no query form) selects one of the available areas. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then selecting an Area from the pull- -down list. Note: This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL is currently set to AREA.
Page 233: Diag:select:last
DIAg:SELect:LAST Description This command (no query form) selects one or more diagnostic menu items to be executed via the DIAg:EXECUTE command. If you specify DIAg:LEVEL SUBSYS, then menu items come from this diagnostic level and are limited to the value returned by the DIAg:NUMITEMS? query.
Page 234: Diag:select:subsys
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS Description This command (no query form) selects one of the available subsystems. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then choosing a Subsystem from the drop- -down list. Note: This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL is currently set to SUBSYS.
Page 235: Diag:select:test
DIAg:SELect:TEST Description This command (no query form) selects one of the available tests. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then choosing a Test from the drop- -down list. Note: This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL is currently set to TEST.
Page 236: Diag:state
DIAg:STATE Description This command (no query form) changes the oscilloscope operating state. Depending on the argument, diagnostics capabilities are either turned on or off. This command is equivalent to opening the DIAg:STATE dialog (ON) or closing it (OFF). Group Diagnostics Related Commands TEST:STOP Syntax...
Page 237: Diag:stop
DIAg:STOP Description This command (no query form) causes diagnostics (or test) execution to terminate at the end of the next low- -level test. This command is equiv- alent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then clicking Abort. Group Diagnostics Related Commands...
Page 238: Display:clock
DISplay:CLOCk Description This command sets or queries the display of the date and time. This is equivalent to selecting Display Date & Time from the Display menu. The query form of this command returns an ON (1) or an OFF (0). Group Display Control Related Commands...
Page 239: Display:color:mathcolor
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr Description This command sets or queries the color to be used for math traces, ei- ther in the standard palette’s nominal Math color, or according to the color of the source waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and then choosing the Colors tab. Group Display Control Related Commands...
Page 240: Display:color:palette:imageview
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView Description This command sets or queries the color palette for all image view (DPO and WfmDB) traces. Group Display Control Syntax 1 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView {NORMal|MONO- GREEN|MONOGRAY|TEMPErature|SPECTral|USEr} Syntax 2 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView? Arguments H NORMal This colors traces according to their channel. This is the default color palette.
Page 241 Example 2 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView? This query might return :DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW NORMAL indicating that the Normal color palette is currently selected, which colors traces according to their channel. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 221 --...
Page 242: Display:color:palette:recordview
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView Description This command sets or queries the color palette for all record view (non image view) waveforms. Group Display Control Syntax 1 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView {NORMal|MONO- GREEN|MONOGRAY|TEMPerature|SPECTral|USEr} Syntax 2 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView? Arguments H NORMal This colors traces according to their channel. This is the default color palette.
Page 243 Example 2 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView? This query might return :DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RECORDVIEW NORMAL indicating that the Normal color palette is currently selected, which colors traces according to their channel. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 223 --...
Page 244: Display:color:palette:user:caret
DISplay:COLOR:PALEtte:USEr:CARet Description This command sets or queries the caret color for the user palette. It as- signs the HUE, light, Saturation (HLS) triplet used for the caret color. The caret is the solid, inverted delta positioned on the top graticule line, which indicates the trigger position within the waveform record.
Page 245: Display:color:palette:user:ch
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CH<x> Description This command sets or queries the hue- -lightness- -saturation (HLS) trip- let to be used for the specified channel color for the user palette. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.

Page 246: Display:color:palette:user:graticule
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:GRAticule Description This command sets or queries the user palette graticule color. It assigns the hue- -lightness- -saturation triplet to be used for the graticule color for the user palette. Group Display Control Syntax 1 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:GRAticule <NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1> Syntax 2 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:GRAticule? Arguments H <NR1>...
Page 247: Display:color:palette:user:histogram
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:HIStogram Description This command sets or queries the user palette histogram color. It as- signs the hue- -saturation- -lightness (HLS) triplet to be used for the his- togram color for the user palette. Group Display Control Syntax 1 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:HIStogram <NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1> Syntax 2 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:HIStogram? Arguments...
Page 248: Display:color:palette:user:mask
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK Description This command sets or queries the user palette mask color. It assigns the hue- -lightness- -saturation (HLS) color for the mask color for the user palette. Group Display Control Syntax 1 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK <NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1> Syntax 2 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK? Arguments H <NR1> Hue.
Page 249: Display:color:palette:user:maskhighlight
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASKHighlight Description This command sets or queries the user palette mask hits color. It assigns the hue- -lightness- -saturation (HLS) triplet to be used for the mask high- light (mask hits) color for the user palette. Group Display Control Syntax 1 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASKHighlight <NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>...
Page 250: Display:color:palette:user:math
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MATH<x> Description This command sets or queries the user palette math colors. It assigns the hue- -lightness- -saturation (HLS) triplet to be used for the specified math waveform for the user palette. The math waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instru- ments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.

Page 251: Display:color:palette:user:ref
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:REF<x> Description This command sets or queries the user palette reference colors assigned to reference waveforms. It assigns the hue- -lightness- -saturation (HLS) triplet to be used for the specified reference waveform color for the user palette. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.

Page 252: Display:color:palette:user
DISplay:COLOR:PALEtte:USEr? Description This command queries the color palette for group settings. It outputs settings from the DISPlay CARET, CH<x>, GRATICULE, HISTO- GRAM, MASK, MASKHIGHLIGHT, MATH<x>, and REF<x> com- mands. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr? Example 1 DISplay:COLOR:PALETTE:USEr? This query might return :DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:GRATICULE 165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100;CH2 300 50,100;CH3 60,50,100;CH4 240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0;REF2...
Page 253: Display:color:refcolor
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr Description This command sets or queries the color to be used for reference traces, either in the standard palette’s nominal REF color or according to the color of the source waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and then choosing the Colors tab. Group Display Control Related Commands...
Page 254: Display:color
DISplay:COLOr? Description This query- -only command returns the settings from the PALETTE, MATHCOLOR and REFCOLOR commands. This is equivalent to se- lecting Colors from the Display menu. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:COLOr? Arguments None Example DISplay:COLOr? This query might return: :DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW TEMPERA- TURE;RECORDVIEW NORMAL;USER:GRATICULE 165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100;CH2 300,50,100;CH3...
Page 255: Display:filter
DISplay:FILTer Description This command sets or queries the type of interpolation to use for the display. Filtering only applies to normal- -mode acquisition. The DIS- play:FILTer command also provides selection for acquisition interpola- tion type. This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform Interpola- tion from the Display menu.
Page 256: Display:format
DISplay:FORMat Description This command sets or queries the display format. This command is equivalent to selecting Format from the Display menu. Group Display Control Syntax 1 (Two- -channel instruments) DISplay:FORMat {YT|XY} Syntax 2 (Four- -channel instruments) DISplay:FORMat {YT|XY|XYZ} Syntax 3 DISplay:FORMat? Arguments H YT...
Page 257 Example 1 DISplay:FORMat YT This command selects a voltage versus time format for the display. Example 2 DISplay:FORMat? This query might return: :DISPLAY:FORMAT XYZ This is for the display format, indicating that the display is in the XYZ mode. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 237 --...
Page 258: Display:graticule
DISplay:GRATicule Description This command selects or queries the type of graticule that is displayed. This command is equivalent to selecting Graticule Style from the Dis- play menu. Group Display Control Syntax 1 DISplay:GRAticule {CROSS- Hair|FRAme|FULl|GRId|IRE|NTSC|MV|PAL} Syntax 2 DISplay:GRAticule? Arguments H CROSSHair This specifies a frame and cross hairs.
Page 259 Example 1 DISplay:GRAticule FRAme This command sets the graticule type to display the frame only. Example 2 DISplay:GRAticule? This query might return: :DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL This indicates that all graticule elements are selected. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 239 --...
Page 260: Display:intensity:autobright
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright Description This command enables automatic, ongoing adjustment of the intensity to display images. The query form returns a 1 (ON) or a 0 (OFF). This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and choosing the Appearance tab. Group Display Control Related Commands...
Page 261 Example 2 DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright? This query might return: :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT 1 This indicates that system adjustment of waveform intensity is enabled. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 241 --...
Page 262: Display:intensity:screensaver
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER Description This command sets and queries the screen saver features of the MS Windows operating system. When enabled, a delay timer (set in sec- onds by the DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY command) begins counting down. When this screen saver delay times out, the screen low- -power mode engages.
Page 263: Display:intensity:screensaverdelay
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY Description This command sets or queries the timeout of the screen saver features of the display system. When enabled (after the specified screen saver delay seconds of control activity and when the screen saver feature is enabled) the instrument activates the screen saver feature. Normal in- strument displays are restored and the delay timer is reset upon any control activity.
Page 264: Display:intensity:waveform:imageview
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView Description This command sets or queries the saturation level for image view wave- forms. Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:INTENSITY:WAVEform:RECORDView, DISplay:INTENSI- Ty:AUTOBright Syntax 1 DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView <NR1> Syntax 2 DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView? Arguments H <NR1> This is the waveform saturation and ranges from 10 to 100 percent. Example 1 DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView 100 This command sets the image view waveform saturation to 100 percent.
Page 265: Display:intensity:waveform:recordview
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView Description This command sets or queries the saturation level for record view wa- veforms. Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:INTENSITY:WAVEform:IMAGEView, DISplay:INTENSI- Ty:AUTOBright Syntax 1 DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView <NR1> Syntax 2 DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView? Arguments H <NR1> This is the waveform saturation and ranges from 10 to 100 percent. Example 1 DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView 100 This command sets the record view waveform saturation to 100 per-...
Page 266: Display:intensity
DISplay:INTENSITy? Description This query- -only command returns the waveform saturation level, auto- bright state, and screen saver settings. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and choosing the Ap- pearance tab. Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTPBright, DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVE- form:IMAGEView, DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView, DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER, DISplay:INTENSI-...
Page 267: Display:persistence
DISplay:PERSistence Description This command sets or queries the persistence aspect of the display. This affects the display only and is equivalent to selecting Display Persis- tence from the Display menu. Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:VARPersist Syntax 1 DISplay:PERSistence {OFF|INFPersist|VARPers- ist} Syntax 2 DISplay:PERSistence?
Page 268: Display:persistence:reset
DISplay:PERSistence:RESET Description This command controls the clearing of persistence data. Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:PERSistence, DISplay:VARPersist Syntax DISplay:PERSistence:RESET Example DISplay:PERSistence:RESET This command clears the display of persistence data. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 248 --...
Page 269: Display:screentext:label:Name
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe Description This command sets the text to be displayed for a given label. The label is specified by <x>. The value of <x> can range from 1 through 8. Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DIS- play:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LA- Bel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS Syntax DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe <String>...
Page 270: Display:screentext:label:Xpos
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS Description This command sets the horizontal position of a given screen text label. The label is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 8. Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DIS- play:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LA- Bel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS Syntax <NR1>...
Page 271: Display:screentext:label:Ypos
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS Description This command sets the vertical position of a given label. The label is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 8. Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DIS- play:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREEN- TExt:LABel<x>:XPOS Syntax <NR1>...
Page 272: Display:screentext:label
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>? Description This command returns the screen text setting for a given label. Specifi- cally, it provides the name, horizontal position (XPOS), and vertical position (YPOS). Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DIS- play:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LA- Bel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS Syntax DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>? Example DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel3?? This query might return...

Page 273: Display:screentext:state
DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE Description This command controls the display of screen text. Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?, DIS- play:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LA- Bel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS Syntax DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>} Arguments H ON This turns on the display of screen text. H OFF This turns off the display of screen text. H <NR1>...
Page 274: Display:screentext
DISplay:SCREENTExt? Description This command returns all screen text settings. Group Display Control Related Commands DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREEN- TExt:LABel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS Syntax DISplay:SCREENTExt? Example 1 DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT? This command might reply: :DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:STATE 0;LABEL1:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS 5;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LA- BEL2:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS 20;:DISPLAY:SCREEN- TEXT:LABEL3:NAME ””;;XPOS 100;YPOS 35;:DIS- PLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS 50;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS 65;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:NAME...
Page 275: Display:showremote
DISplay:SHOWREmote Description This command sets or queries the state of the remote display feature and is equivalent to selecting Display Remote from the Display menu. The query form of this command returns ON (1) or OFF (0). This feature allows you to view waveforms and other graticule data on a remote display using remote control software like VNC (Virtual Net- work Computing) or Symantec pcAnywhere.
Page 276: Display:style
DISplay:STYle Description This command sets or queries how the data is displayed for normal and FastAcq modes. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Style from the Display menu and choosing a style. Group Display Control Syntax 1 DISplay:STYle {VECtors|DOTs|INTENSIFied} Syntax 2 DISplay:STYle? Arguments...
Page 277: Display:trigbar
DISplay:TRIGBar Description This command controls or queries the display of the trigger- -level indi- cator bar/s. Indicator bars show where the trigger voltage level is set. The instrument will only display the bar if the associated trigger source is also displayed. If both a main and a delayed trigger are displayed, then two bars will appear.
Page 278: Display:varpersist
DISplay:VARpersist Description This command sets or queries persistence decay time, which is the approximate decay time for a freshly struck persistence sample. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu, selecting the Appearance tab, and then entering the desired Per- sist Time.
Page 279: Display
DISplay? Description This query- -only command returns the current Display settings. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and then viewing the contents of each tab. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay? Example DISplay? This query might return :DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW MONO- GREEN;...
Page 280 100;YPOS 80; :DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS 95; :DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS 110; :DISPLAY:WAVEFORM 1 TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 260 --...
Page 281 EMail Description This command (no query form) sends a test e- -mail message or sets the current e- -mail sent count to zero. Group Email Syntax 1 EMail {TEst|RESet} Arguments H TEst This argument sends a test e- -mail message. H RESet This argument sets the e- -mail sent count to zero.
Page 282 EMail:ATTempts Description This command sets or queries the number of times that an attempt will be made to send e- -mail to the SMTP e- -mail server. The default is 1. Group Email Syntax 1 EMail: ATTempts <NR1> Syntax 2 EMail:ATTempts? Argument H NR1...
Page 283: Email
EMail:AUTHLogin Description This command sets or queries the login name that will be used if the SMTP e- -mail server requires one for authentication. Group Email Syntax 1 EMail:AUTHLogin {<String>} Syntax 2 EMail:AUTHLogin? Argument H <String> This argument is a string that specifies the login name to be used with the SMTP e- -mail server.
Page 284: Email:authpassword
EMail:AUTHPassword Description This command (no query form) sets the password that will be used if the SMTP e- -mail server requires one for authentication. Group Email Syntax EMail:AUTHPassword {<String>} Argument H <String> This argument is a string that specifies the password to be used with the SMTP e- -mail server.
Page 285: Email:count
EMail:COUnt? Description This query only command returns the number of e- -mails that have been sent since E- -mail on Event was armed. The range of values returned can be from 0 to 50. Group Email Syntax EMail:COUnt? Example EMail:COUnt? This query might return :email:COUNT 15 This indicates that 15 e- -mails have been sent since e- -mail on event was...
Page 286: Email:from
EMail:FRom Description This command sets or queries the From line in the e- -mail. The default for the From line is the instrument model and serial number. Group Email Syntax 1 EMail:FRom {<String>} Syntax 2 EMail:FRom? Argument H <String> This argument is a string that is placed in the From line of the e- -mail. An example is ”johnz”.
Page 287: Email:hostwanted
EMail:HOSTwanted Description This command sets or queries the hostname that will be used when e- - mail is sent to the SMTP e- -mail server if the TDS hostname will not work. Group Email Syntax 1 EMail:HOSTwanted {<String>} Syntax 2 EMail:HOSTwanted? Argument H <String>...
Page 288: Email:image
EMail:IMage Description This command sets or queries whether a screen image is included in e- -mail. If this command is set to ON, the format and content of the screen image included is specified using the EXPort commands within the Hard Copy Command group. Group Email Related Commands...
Page 289: Email:limit
EMail:LIMit Description This command sets or queries whether e- -mail is sent when a limit test failure occurs. This command is the same as the LIMit:EMail com- mand. Group Email Related Commands LIMit:EMail Syntax 1 EMail:LIMit {ON|OFF|NR1} Syntax 2 EMail:LIMit? Arguments H ON This argument enables sending e- -mail when a limit test failure oc-...
Page 290: Email:mask
EMail:MASk Description This command sets or queries whether e- -mail is sent when a mask test failure occurs. Group Email Syntax 1 EMail:MASk {ON|OFF|NR1} Syntax 2 EMail:MASk? Arguments H ON This argument enables sending e- -mail when a mask test failure oc- curs.
Page 291: Email:maxsize
EMail:MAXsize Description This command sets or queries the maximum size (in megabytes) of e- - mail that can be sent to the SMTP server. Group Email Syntax 1 EMail:MAXsize {<NR1>} Syntax 2 EMail:MAXsize? Argument H <NR1> The value for NR1 can be 0 through 2000 megabytes. This is the maximum size of each e- -mail that can be sent to the SMTP server.
Page 292: Email:measurement
EMail:MEASurement Description This command sets or queries whether measurement data is included as an attachment to e- -mail. You must specify the saved measurement selection (for all displayed measurements, measurement snapshots, or histogram data) and the measurement format using the Email on Event setup menu.
Page 293: Email:numemails
EMail:NUMemails Description This command sets or queries the number of e- -mails you can send when Email onEvent is armed, from 1 to 50. This limit is to restrict e- -mail floods. Group Email Related Commands EMail RESet Syntax 1 EMail:NUMemails {<NR1>} Syntax 2 EMail:NUMemails?
Page 294: Email:smtpport
EMail:SMTPPort Description This command sets or queries the SMTP port number that the e- -mail server uses if other than the default of 25. Group Email Syntax 1 EMail: SMTPPort {<NR1>} Syntax 2 EMail:SMTPPort? Argument H <NR1> The value for NR1 can be 1 through 65535. This number specifies the TCPIP port number.
Page 295: Email:smtpserver
EMail:SMTPServer Description This command sets or queries the address of the SMTP mail server. Group Email Syntax 1 Email:SMTPServer <string> Syntax 2 Email:SMTPServer? Argument H <string> This argument is the address of the SMTP mail server that will handle the mail service request. For example, ”smtp.tek.com”. Example 1 Email:SMTPServer ”smtp.tek.com”...
Page 296: Email:status
EMail:STATus? Description This query only command returns the status of the last e- -mail you at- tempted to send. The status might be one of the following strings: PASS – indicates that the last e- -mail message sent was successful or that no email message was attempted.
Page 297: Email:timeout
EMail:TIMEout Description This command sets or queries the global timeout in seconds. The de- fault is 30 seconds. You use this timeout for socket connections and may need to change it from the default on some networks. Group Email Syntax 1 EMail:TIMEout <NR1>...
Page 298: Email:to
EMail:TO Description This command sets or queries the address of the recipient(s) of an e- - mail. Group Email Syntax 1 Email:TO <string> Syntax 2 Email:TO? Argument H <string> This argument is the e- -mail address of the recipient (or recipients). Multiple addresses are separated with semicolons (;).
Page 299: Email:trigger
EMail:TRIgger Description This command sets or queries whether e- -mail is sent when a trigger occurs. The e- -mail is sent after the acquisition is complete. Group Email Syntax 1 EMail:TRIgger {ON|OFF|NR1} Syntax 2 EMail:TRIgger? Arguments H ON This argument enables sending e- -mail when a trigger occurs. H OFF This disables sending e- -mail when a trigger occurs.
Page 300: Email:waveform
EMail:WAVEform Description This command sets or queries whether waveform data is included in e- -mail. The waveforms to be included, the start and stop points (and, or, frames for Fast Frame mode), and the data formats are specified by the DATA: and WFMOutpre: commands within the Waveform Transfer Command group.
Page 301: Event
EVENT? Description This query- -only command returns an event code from the Event Queue that provides information about the results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also removes the returned value from the Event Queue. Group Status and Error Related Commands ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB? Syntax EVENT?
Page 302: Evmsg
EVMsg? Description This query- -only command removes a single event code from the Event Queue that is associated with the results of the last *ESR? read and re- turns the event code along with an explanatory message. For more in- formation, see Event Handling.
Page 303: Evqty
EVQty? Description This query- -only command returns the number of event codes that are in the Event Queue. This is useful when using the ALLEv? query, since it lets you know exactly how may events will be returned. Group Status and Error Related Commands ALLEv?, EVENT?, EVMsg? Syntax...
Page 304: Export
EXPort Description This command sends a copy of the waveform to the file path specified by EXPort:FILEName. The EXPort query returns image format and file information. Group Export Syntax 1 EXPort STArt Syntax 2 Export? Arguments H STARt Initiates export. Example 1 EXPort STARt This command initiates export to the file specified file by EX-...
Page 305: Export:filename
EXPort:FILEName Description This command sets or returns the file/path that will be sent export data on the next EXPort command. Group Export Related Commands HARDCopy Syntax 1 EXPort:FILEName <file path> Syntax 2 EXPort:FILEName? Argument H <file path> This specifies that the hard copy is sent to the named file. <file path>...
Page 306: Export:format
EXPort:FORMat Description This command sets or returns the image format for exporting wave- forms to a file. Group Export Syntax 1 EXPort:FORMat {BMP|JPEG|PNG|PCX|TIFF} Syntax 2 EXPort:FORMat? Arguments H BMP Specifies BMP image format. H JPEG Specifies JPEG image format. H PNG Specifies PNG image format.
Page 307: Export:image
EXPort:IMAGe Description This command sets or returns the inksaver mode for exporting wave- forms (File > Export Setup > Images > Image). Group Export Syntax 1 EXPort:IMAGe {NORMal|INKSaver|ENHANcedwfm} Syntax 2 EXPort:IMAGe? Arguments H MORMal Preserves the screen background when printing waveforms. H INKSaver Changes the screen background to white.
Page 308: Export:palette
EXPort:PALEtte Description This command sets or returns the export color palette. Group Export Syntax 1 EXPort:PALEtte {COLOr|GRAYscale|BLACKANDWhite} Syntax 2 EXPort:PALEtte? Arguments H COLOr Hardcopy output is color. H GRAYscale Hardcopy output is gray. H BLACKANDwhite Hardcopy output is black and white. Example 1 EXPort:PALEtte This command sets the export color palette to Color.
Page 309: Export:view
EXPort:VIEW Description This command sets or returns the area of the screen to be exported. Group Export Syntax 1 EXPort:VIEW {FULLSCREEN|GRAticule|FULLNOmenu} Syntax 2 EXPort:VIEW? Arguments H FULLSCREEN Displays both the graticule and menu areas of the screen. H GRAticule Displays only the graticule area of the screen. H FULLNOmenu Displays the full screen but hides any menus or toolbars.
Page 310: Factory
FACtory Description This command (no query form) resets the instrument to its factory de- fault settings. This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP button located on the instrument front panel or selecting Recall Default Setup from the File menu. Group Save and Recall Related Commands...
Page 311: Fastacq:state
FASTAcq:STATE Description This command sets or queries the state of Fast Acquisitions. This com- mand is equivalent to the FASTACQ button on the front panel. Group Acquisition Syntax 1 FASTAcq:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>} Syntax 2 FASTAcq:STATE? Arguments H ON This enables Fast Acquisitions mode. H OFF This disables Fast Acquisitions mode.
Page 312: Fastacq
FASTAcq? Description This query- -only command returns the state of Fast Acquisitions. This command is equivalent to pressing the FASTACQ button on the front panel. Group Acquisition Syntax FASTAcq? Example FASTAcq? This query might return the following string for the current acquisition parameters: :FASTACQ:STATE 0 TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide...
Page 313: Filesystem:copy
FILESystem:COPy Description This command (no query form) copies a named file to a new file. The new file may be in a totally separate directory than the old file. You can only copy one file at a time using this command. Wild card characters are not allowed.
Page 314: Filesystem:cwd
FILESystem:CWD Description This command sets or queries the current working directory for FILE- System GPIB commands. The default working directory is ”C:\Tek- Scope”. Anytime that you use this command to change the directory, the directory that you specify is retained as the current working directo- ry until you either change the directory or you delete the directory.
Page 315: Filesystem:delete
FILESystem:DELEte Description This command (no query form) deletes a named file. It does not delete directories. Use the FILESystem:RMDir command to delete a directory. Group File System Related Commands FILESystem:COPy, FILESystem:CWD Syntax FILESystem:DELEte <file path> Arguments H <file path> This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
Page 316: Filesystem:dir
FILESystem:DIR? Description This query- -only command returns a list of quoted strings. Each string contains the name of a file or directory in the current working directory. Group File System Related Commands FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:MKDir Syntax FILESystem:DIR? Arguments None Example FILESystem:DIR? This query returns a list of files and directories in the current working directory.
Page 317: Filesystem:mkdir
FILESystem:MKDir Description This command (no query form) creates a new directory. Group File System Related Commands FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DIR? Syntax FILESystem:MKDir <directory path> Arguments H <directory path> This is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create Example 1 FILESystem:MKDir ”C:\NewDirectory” This command creates the directory named NewDirectory at the root of the C drive.
Page 318: Filesystem:print
FILESystem:PRInt Description This command (no query form) prints a named file to a named port. This command is the same as the FILESystem:READFile command. This command is not IEEE 488.2 compliant for the following reasons: The command produces output on the 488.2 bus. Queries, not commands, are the only message units that should produce output on the 488.2 bus.
Page 319: Filesystem:readfile
FILESystem:READFile Description This command (no query form) prints a named file to a named port. It is identical to the FILESystem:PRInt command. This command is not IEEE 488.2 compliant for the following reasons: The command produces output on the 488.2 bus. Queries, not commands, are the only message units that should produce output on the 488.2 bus.
Page 320: Filesystem:rename
FILESystem:REName Description This command (no query form) assigns a new name to an existing file. Group File System Related Command FILESystem:CWD Syntax FILESystem:REName <old file path>,<new file path> Arguments H <old file path> This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
Page 321: Filesystem:rmdir
FILESystem:RMDir Description This command (no query form) deletes a named directory. The directo- ry cannot contain any files. If there are files in the directory, they must first be deleted. The directory must not be a read- -only directory. Group File System Related Command FILESystem:CWD...
Page 322: Filesystem:writefile
FILESystem:WRITEFile Description This command (no query form) copies the block data from the GPIB port to a named file. Group File System Related Command FILESystem:CWD Syntax FILESystem:WRITEFile <file path>,<data> Arguments H <file path> This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name H <data>...
Page 323 FILESystem:WRITEFile ”C:\SomeNewFile.txt”,#221 1.23 2.54 8.22 -1.22<NL+EOI> This command creates a file named ”SomeNewFile.txt” on the root of the C drive, containing the string of 21 characters ” 1.23 2.54 8.22 - -1.22”. Because the data argument is indefinite format arbitrary block program data, it may contain any 8- -bit values, including newline char- acters (hexadecimal 0a).
Page 324: Filesystem
FILESystem? Description This query- -only command returns the directory listing of the current working directory. This query is the same as the FILESystem:DIR? query. Group File System Related Commands FILESystem:COPy, FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DELEte, FILE- System:DIR?, FILESystem:PRInt, FILESystem:READFile, FILESys- tem:REName, FILESystem:WRITEFile Syntax FILESystem? Arguments None.
Page 325: Hardcopy
HARDCopy Description This command sends a copy of the screen display to the port specified by HARDCopy:PORT. This command is equivalent to pressing the PRINT button on the front panel. When printing to a file, the file for- mat is Windows Bitmap Image (BMP). The HARDCopy query returns the port and file path.
Page 326: Hardcopy:filename
HARDCopy:FILEName Description This command sets or returns the file that will be sent hardcopy data on the next HARDCopy command (if the HARDCopy:PORT is set to FILE). Group Hardcopy Related Commands HARDCopy Syntax 1 HARDCopy:FILEName <file path> Syntax 2 HARDCopy:FILEName? Argument H <file path>...
Page 327 Example 3 HARDCopy:FILEName ”TEK??.BMP” This command sets TEK as the selected file name with a numeric, two- - digit suffix. The instrument might return :HARDCOPY:FILENAME ”TEK00.BMP”;”TEK01.BMP” This indicates TEK00.BMP is the first file and TEK01.BMP is the sec- ond file. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 307 --...
Page 328: Hardcopy:image
HARDCopy:IMAGe Description This command sets or returns the inksaver mode for hard copy printing. Group Hardcopy Syntax 1 HARDCopy:IMAGe {NORMal|INKSaver|ENHANcedwfm} Syntax 2 HARDCopy:IMAGe? Arguments H NORMal Preserves the screen background when printing waveforms. H INKSaver Changes the screen background to white. This saves ink when print- ing waveforms.
Page 329: Hardcopy:layout
HARDCopy:LAYout Description This command sets or returns the page orientation for hard copy. Group Hardcopy Syntax 1 HARDCopy:LAYout {PORTRait|LANDscape} Syntax 2 HARDCopy:LAYout? Arguments H PORTRait Orients the screen image vertically on the printed page. H LANDscape Orients the screen image horizontally on the printed page. Example 1 HARDCopy:LAYout LANDscape This command sets the hardcopy page orientation to Landscape.
Page 330: Hardcopy:palette
HARDCopy:PALEtte Description This command sets or returns the hardcopy color palette. Group Hardcopy Syntax 1 HARDCopy:PALEtte {COLOr|GRAYscale|BLACKAND- White} Syntax 2 HARDCopy:PALEtte? Arguments H COLOr This argument sets the hardcopy output to color. H GRAYscale This argument sets the hardcopy output to gray scale H BLACKANDwhite This argument sets the hardcopy output to black and white.
Page 331: Hardcopy:port
HARDCopy:PORT Description This command selects or returns whether the hardcopy data will be sent to a file or printed on the next hardcopy command (for example, the HARDCopy STARt command). This is equivalent to selecting Print in the File menu and then either choosing Print to file or specifying the default printer.
Page 332: Hardcopy:view
HARDCopy:VIEW Description This command sets or returns the area of the screen to be hardcopied. Group Hardcopy Syntax 1 HARDCopy:VIEW {FULLSCREEN|GRAticule|FULLNOme- Syntax 2 HARDCopy:VIEW? Arguments H FULLSCREEN Sets the area to be hardcopied to both the graticule and menu areas of the screen H GRAticule Sets the area to be hardcopied to only the graticule area of the screen.
Page 333: Hdr
Description This command is identical to the HEADer query and is included for backward compatibility purposes. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands HEADer, VERBose Syntax 1 HDR {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 HDR? Arguments H OFF This sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the instrument to omit headers on query responses, so that only the argu- ment is returned.
Page 334: Header
HEADer Description This command sets or queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the instrument to either include or omit headers on query re- sponses. Note: This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2- -1987 Common Commands (those starting with an asterisk); these commands never return headers.
Page 335 Example 2 HEADer? This query might return :HEADER 1 This indicates that the instrument is including headers on applicable query responses. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 315 --...
Page 336: Histogram
HIStogram? Description This query- -only command returns all histogram parameters; it queries the state of all histogram parameters that the user can set. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the Mea- sure menu. Group Histogram Related Commands MEASUrement:METHod Syntax 1 HIStogram?
Page 337: Histogram:box
HIStogram:Box Description This command defines or returns the left, top, right, and bottom bound- aries of the histogram box, in source waveform coordinates. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the Mea- sure menu and then setting Limits for Left, Right, Top, and Bottom in the appropriate boxes.
Page 338 Example 2 HIStogram:Box? This query might return :HISTOGRAM:BOX 1.0000E-09, 0.2500, 2.0000E-09, 0.5000 This identifies the coordinates of the histogram box in source waveform coordinates. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 318 --...
Page 339: Histogram:boxpcnt
HIStogram:BOXPcnt Description This command defines or queries the left, top, right, and bottom posi- tions of the histogram box, in percentage coordinates. The upper left has the value 0,0 and the lower right has the value 100, 100. Any value outside the range of 0 to 100 is clipped.
Page 340 Example 1 HIStogram:BOXPcnt 30.0,25.0,70.0,75.0 This command sets the left boundary of the histogram box to 30% of the graticule (3 divisions from the left edge); the top boundary to 25% of the graticule (0.25 x 8 = 2.0 divisions from the top edge); the right boundary to 70% of the graticule (7 divisions from the left edge);...
Page 341: Histogram:count
HIStogram:COUNt Description This command (no query form) clears the count and statistics for the histogram and the histogram source data. If the histogram is on, then counting restarts. This command is equivalent selecting Waveform His- tograms from the Measure menu and then clicking the Reset button. Group HIStogram Related Commands...
Page 342: Histogram:data
HIStogram:DATa? Description This query- -only command returns an ASCII comma- -separated list of histogram data numbers. This command returns 200 values for vertical histograms and 500 values for horizontal histograms. Note: You must set the histogram state to ON before sending this query or the system will generate an error indicating: ”Source wave- form is not active”.
Page 343: Histogram:display
HIStogram:DISplay Description This command sets the scaling of the histogram data display to be the count of each histogram bin or the log of that count. The default scaling is Linear. The query form of this command returns either the histogram display scaling or the display status ”disabled.”...
Page 344 Example 2 HIStogram:DISplay? This query might return :HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY LOG indicating that the current histogram display scaling is the log count of each histogram bin. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 324 --...
Page 345: Histogram:function
HIStogram:FUNCtion Description This command either selects the type of histogram to create or returns the current histogram type. This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histogram from the Measure menu and then choosing either Horizontal or Vertical from the Histogram Mode group box. Group HIStogram Related Commands...
Page 346: Histogram:mode
HIStogram:MODe Description This command selects the type of histogram to create or disables the histogram display. The query form either returns the current histogram type or that histogram display is disabled. This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histogram from the Measure menu and then choosing from the Histogram Mode group box.
Page 347 Example 2 HIStogram:MODe? This query might return :HISTOGRAM:MODE OFF This indicates that histogram display is disabled. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 327 --...
Page 348: Histogram:size
HIStogram:SIZe Description This command sets or queries the width or height of the histogram on the screen. This is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the Measure menu and then entering a value in the Histogram Size box. Group HIStogram Related Commands HIStogram:DISplay Syntax 1...
Page 349: Histogram:source
HIStogram:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries which source will be compared against the histogram box when the histogram testing is enabled. This is equiv- alent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired waveform source. The waveform need not be displayed for histograms to run.
Page 350 Example 2 HIStogram:SOUrce? This query might return :HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1 This indicating that the waveform for channel 1 is the source for the histogram. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 330 --...
Page 351: Histogram:state
HIStogram:STATE Description This command sets or queries whether the histogram calculations are enabled. This is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the Measure menu. Group HIStogram Related Commands HIStogram:MODe, MEASUrement:METHod Syntax 1 HIStogram:STATE {ON|OFF|NR1} Syntax 2 HIStogram:STATE? Arguments H <ON> This enables histogram calculations.
Page 352: Horizontal:divisions
HORizontal:DIVisions? Description This query- -only command returns the number of graticule divisions over which the waveform is displayed. Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:DIVisions? Arguments None. Example HORizontal:DIVisions? This query might return :HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS 10.0000 indicating that the waveform is displayed across ten division. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 332 --...
Page 353: Horizontal:fastframe:count
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt Description This command sets or queries FastFrame frame count. This command is equivalent to selecting Fast Frame Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and entering a value in the Frame Count box. FastFrame captures a series of triggered acquisitions with minimal intervening time. Group Horizontal Related Commands...
Page 354: Horizontal:fastframe:length
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth Description This command sets or queries the horizontal record length to the num- ber of sample points in each frame. This command is equivalent to se- lecting FastFrame Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and entering a value in the Rec Length box. FastFrame captures a series of triggered acquisi- tions with minimal intervening time between them.
Page 355 HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes: FRAMESTart:<wfm> Description This command sets or queries the start frame number on the specified waveform for the FastFrame multiple frames feature. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x>, and REF<x>. The value of x can be an integer ranging from 1 through 4 in four- -channel instruments and 1 through 2 in two- -channel instruments.
Page 356: Horizontal:fastframe:multipleframes:framestart:
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe Description This command sets or queries the mode for the FastFrame multiple frames feature. This feature displays multiple frames in an overlaid manner. Group Horizontal Related Commands HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm> <NR1>, HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm> <NR1>, HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt Syntax 1 HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe {OFF|OVERlay} Syntax 2 HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe? Argument H OFF This turns off the multiple frames mode.

Page 357: Horizontal:fastframe:multipleframes:numframes:
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes: NUMFRames:<wfm> Description This command sets or queries the number of frames on the specified waveform for the FastFrame multiple frames feature. The multiple frames feature supports displaying multiple frames in an overlaid man- ner. Group Horizontal Related Commands HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm> <NR1>, HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe, HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt...

Page 358 Example 2 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUM- FRAMES:CH1? This query might return: :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUM- FRAMES:CH1 1 This indicates that the number of frames on channel 1 is 3. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 338 --...
Page 359: Horizontal:fastframe:ref:frame
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe Description This command sets or queries the FastFrame reference frame number. The Reference Frame number is used to calculate time differences for each frame and displays those differences in the graticule. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup in the Horiz/Acq menu and entering a value in the Time Stamps/Frame box.
Page 360: Horizontal:fastframe:ref:source
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries FastFrame Reference waveform source. This is equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and choosing the reference source. Group Horizontal Related Commands HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe, HORizontal:FASTframe:TIME- stamp:DELTa:<wfm>?, HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:REF?, HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk Syntax 1 HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce <wfm> Syntax 2 HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce? Argument...
Page 361: Horizontal:fastframe:selected:
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm> Description This command sets or returns the FastFrame Selected frame number on the specified waveform. This is equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu, and then choosing the waveform source and frame. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>. The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4- -channel models and 1 to 2 for 2- -channel models.

Page 362: Horizontal:fastframe:state
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE Description This command sets or returns the state of FastFrame acquisition. This is equivalent to setting FastFrame to On in the FastFrame Setup menu. FastFrame lets users capture a series of triggered acquisitions with minimal time between them. The digitizing oscilloscope in FastFrame mode is ready to accept a con- tinuous burst of triggers 400 ms after the controller sends the AC- Quire:STATE RUN command.
Page 363: Horizontal:fastframe:sumframe
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame Description This command sets or queries the summary frame mode. When ENVe- lope is selected, the last frame in a FastFrame acquisition is an envelope of all the prior frames in the acquisition. When AVErage is selected, the last frame is replaced with a frame that is the computed average of all the prior frames in the acquisition.
Page 364: Horizontal:fastframe:timestamp:all:
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL:<wfm>? Description This query- -only command returns the frame number and time stamp for each frame between requested frames, inclusive, within the speci- fied waveform. Argument order is unimportant. Valid waveforms in- clude CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>. The x variable can be ex- pressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4- -channel models and 1 to 2 for 2- -channel models.

Page 365: Horizontal:fastframe:timestamp:between:
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen:<wfm>? Description This query- -only command returns the relative trigger for the delta time between the specified frames, within the specified waveform. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>. The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4- -channel models and 1 to 2 for 2- -channel models.

Page 366: Horizontal:fastframe:timestamp:delta:
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa:<wfm>? Description This query- -only command returns the relative time between the trig- gers of the FastFrame Selected and the FastFrame Reference, within the specified waveform. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x>, and REF<x>. The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4- -channel models and 1 to 2 for 2- -channel models.

Page 367: Horizontal:fastframe:timestamp:frame:
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAMe:<wfm>? Description This query- -only command returns the absolute trigger date and time for the specified frame and waveform. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>. The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4- -channel models and 1 to 2 for 2- -chan- nel models.

Page 368: Horizontal:fastframe:timestamp:ref
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF? Description This query- -only command returns the absolute trigger date and time for FastFrame reference. The format of the output is as follows: DD MON YYYY HH:MM:SS.xxx xxx xxx xxx DD MON YYYY is day, month, and year HH:MM:SS is hours, minutes, and seconds .xxx xxx xxx xxx is fractions of a second to picoseconds Group Horizontal...
Page 369: Horizontal:fastframe:timestamp:selected:
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp: SELECTED:<wfm>? Description This query- -only command returns the absolute trigger date and time for the FastFrame Selected, within the specified waveform. Valid wave- forms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>. The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4- -channel models and 1 to 2 for 2- -channel models.

Page 370: Horizontal:fastframe:track
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk Description This command sets up or returns the state of FastFrame tracking fea- ture. This command is equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and then clicking the desired Frame Tracking state. When FastFrame Track is set to ”live”, the channel and math wave- forms are locked together.
Page 371 Example 1 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACk LIVE This command sets FastFrame Track to live. Example 2 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK? This query might return :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK ALL This indicates that all FastFrame Selected Frames and the FastFrame Reference will be locked together. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 351 --...
Page 372: Horizontal:fastframe:xzero:all:ch
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL:CH<x>? Description This query-only command returns the frame number and xzero for each frame between requested frames, inclusive, within the specified wave- form. Argument order is unimportant. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.

Page 373 Example HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL:CH1? 1,10 This query might return: :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:ALL:CH1 1,10,”1: 3.3352E-09”,”2: 1.4647E-09”,”3: 2.4770E-09”,”4: 1.4395E-09”,”5: 1.0857E-09”,”6: 1.0410E-09”,”7: 1.4172E-09”,”8: 1.4437E-09”,”9: 1.7050E-09”,”10: 2.9050E-10”\n’ This lists xzeros from frame 1 through frame 10 for the channel 1 wa- veform. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 353 --...
Page 374: Horizontal:fastframe:xzero:all:ref
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL:REF<x>? Description This query- -only command returns the frame number and xzero for each frame between requested frames, inclusive, within the specified wave- form. Argument order is unimportant. The reference waveform is speci- fied by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.

Page 375 Example HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL:REF1? 1,10 This query might return: :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:ALL:REF1 1,10,”1: 3.3352E-09”,”2: 1.4647E-09”,”3: 2.4770E-09”,”4: 1.4395E-09”,”5: 1.0857E-09”,”6: 1.0410E-09”,”7: 1.4172E-09”,”8: 1.4437E-09”,”9: 1.7050E-09”,”10: 2.9050E-10”\n’ This lists xzeros from frame 1 through frame 10 for the reference 1 wa- veform. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 355 --...
Page 376: Horizontal:fastframe:xzero:frame:ch
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:FRAme:CH<x>? Description This query- -only command returns xzero for the specified frame. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. Xzero is the subsample time between the trigger sample (designated by WFMOutpre:PT_Off?) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform specified.

Page 377: Horizontal:fastframe:xzero:frame:ref
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:FRAme:REF<x>? Description This query- -only command returns xzero for the specified frame. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. Xzero is the subsample time between the trigger sample (designated by WFMOutpre:PT_Off?) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform specified.

Page 378: Horizontal:fastframe:xzero:ref
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:REF? Description This query- -only command returns xzero for the FastFrame reference waveform’s frame. Xzero is the subsample time between the trigger sample (designated by WFMOutpre:PT_Off?) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform specified. Group Horizontal Related Commands WFMOutputpre:XZEro?, WFMOutpre:PT_Off?, HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL:CH<x>?, HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL:REF<x>?,...
Page 379: Horizontal:fastframe:xzero:selected:ch
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:SELECTED:CH<x>? Description This query- -only command returns xzero for FastFrame Selected, with- in the specified waveform. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. Xzero is the subsample time between the trigger sample (designated by WFMOutpre:PT_Off?) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform specified.

Page 380: Horizontal:fastframe:xzero:selected:ref
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:SELECTED:REF<x>? Description This query- -only command returns xzero for FastFrame Selected within the specified waveform. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. Xzero is the subsample time between the trigger sample (designated by WFMOutpre:PT_Off?) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform specified.

Page 381: Horizontal:fastframe
HORizontal:FASTframe? Description This query- -only command returns all of the settings for the horizontal FastFrame commands. Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe? Example HORizontal:FASTframe? This query might return :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE 1;READOUTS 0;SUM- FRAME NONE;MULTIPLEFRAMES:MODE OVERLAY;FRAMES- TART:CH1 1;CH2 1;CH3 1;CH4 1;MATH1 1;MATH2 1;MATH3 1;MATH4 1;REF1 1;REF2 1;REF3 1;REF4 1;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUM- FRAMES:CH1 2;CH2 2;CH3 2;CH4 2;MATH1 2;MATH2 2;MATH3 2;MATH4 2;REF1 2;REF2 2;REF3 2;REF4...
Page 382: Horizontal[:Main]:Delay:mode
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe Description This command sets or queries the time base trigger delay mode. This command is equivalent to choosing Delay Mode On from the Horiz/ Acq menu. Group Horizontal Related Commands HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe Syntax 1 HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe [ON|OFF|<NR1>] Syntax 2 HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe? Arguments H ON This enables the time base trigger delay mode.
Page 383: Horizontal[:Main]:Delay:position
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition Description This command sets or queries the time base position when Horizontal Delay Mode is turned on. This command is equivalent to selecting Hor- izontal/Acquisition Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and then entering a Ref Point value. Group Horizontal Related Commands HORizontal[:MAIn}:DELay:TIMe Syntax 1...
Page 384: Horizontal[:Main]:Delay:time
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe Description This command sets or queries the time base trigger delay time. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and choosing a value for Horiz Delay. Group Horizontal Related Commands HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe, HORizon- tal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition Syntax 1 HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe <NR3>...
Page 385: Horizontal:main:interpratio
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio? Description This query- -only command returns the Horizontal Main time base inter- polation ratio. The ratio is useful for calculating the maximum sampling rate when users request sampling rates that are faster than the maximum rate specified by the acquisition hardware. The query HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate? returns the sampling rate (real and interpolated).
Page 386: Horizontal[:Main]:Position
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition This command either positions the waveform horizontally on the dis- play or returns the horizontal position on the display and is identical to the HORizontal:POSition command. When Horizontal Delay mode is turned off, this command is equivalent to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front- -panel.
Page 387: Horizontal:main:samplerate
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate Description This command sets the horizontal sample rate to the desired number of samples per second. The record length is automatically adjusted at the same time to maintain a constant number of data points in each frame. The query form of this command returns the current horizontal sample rate.
Page 388: Horizontal[:Main]:Scale
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle Description This command sets the time per division for the time base or returns its horizontal scale on the display and is identical to the HORizon- tal:SCAle command. The specified scale value is rounded to a valid scale setting. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and then choosing a Scale value.
Page 389: Horizontal:main:units
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts Description This command sets or returns the units for the horizontal time base. It is equivalent to setting the HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing Group Horizontal Related Commands HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing Syntax 1 HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts <STRing> Syntax 2 HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts? Arguments H <STRing> This is the time base units string. Example 1 HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts ”lum”...
Page 390: Horizontal:main:units:string
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing Description This command sets or returns the units string for the horizontal time base trigger delay. Group Horizontal Related Commands HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts Syntax 1 HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing <string> Syntax 2 HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing? Argument H <string> This is the time base units string. Example 1 HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing lum This command sets the units string for the time base trigger delay to lumens.
Page 391: Horizontal:main
HORizontal:MAIn? Description This query- -only command returns the time per division of the time base. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu. Group Horizontal Related Commands HORizontal:SCAle Syntax HORizontal:MAIn? Example HORizontal:MAIn? This query might return: :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO 1.0000;SCALE 40.0000E-9;POSITION 50.0000;SAMPLERATE 1.2500E+9;UNITS:STRING ”s”...
Page 392: Horizontal:position
HORizontal:POSition Description This command either positions the waveform horizontally on the dis- play or returns its horizontal position on the display. When Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off, this command is equivalent to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel. Group Horizontal Related Commands...
Page 393: Horizontal:recordlength
HORizontal:RECOrdlength Description This command sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame. The query form of this command returns the cur- rent horizontal record length. This command is equivalent to selecting Resolution from the Horiz/Acq menu and then entering the desired Rec Length.
Page 394: Horizontal:resolution
HORizontal:RESOlution Description This command sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame. The sample rate is automatically adjusted at the same time to maintain a constant time per division. The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record length. This com- mand is equivalent to adjusting the RESOLUTION knob on the front panel.
Page 395: Horizontal:roll
HORizontal:ROLL Description This command sets or queries the Roll Mode status. Use Roll Mode when you want to view data at very slow sweep speeds. It is useful for observing data samples on the screen as they occur. This command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition Setup from the Horiz/ Acq menu, selecting the Acquisition tab, and setting the Roll Mode to Auto or Off.
Page 396: Horizontal:scale
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is pro- vided to maintain program compatibility with some older models of Tektronix instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Posi- tion/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and entering the desired Scale val-...
Page 397: Horizontal:trigger:position
This command sets or queries the position of the trigger and is identical to the HORizontal:MAIn:POSition command. It is provided to maintain program compatibility with some older models of Tektronix instru- ments. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and entering the desired Position.
Page 398: Horizontal
HORizontal? Description This query- -only command returns all settings for the horizontal com- mands. Group HORizontal Syntax HORizontal? Example HORizontal? This query might return the following horizontal settings :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 0;POSITION 50.0000;TIME 0.00000000000;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO 1.0000;SCALE 40.0000E-9;POSITION 50.0000;SAM- PLERATE 1.2500E+9;UNITS:STRING ”s”;:HORIZON- TAL:RECORDLENGTH 500;RESOLUTION 500;ROLL AUTO;FASTFRAME:STATE 1;READOUTS 0;SUMFRAME NONE;MULTIPLEFRAMES:MODE OVERLAY;FRAMES- TART:CH1 1;CH2 1;CH3 1;CH4 1;MATH1 1;MATH2...
Page 399 Description This query- -only command returns identifying information about the instrument and related firmware. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands *IDN? Syntax Example This query might return :TEK/TDS5404,CF:91.1CT,FV:01.00.912 This indicates the instrument model number, configured format, and firmware version number. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 379 --...
Page 400: Limit:beep
LIMit:Beep Description This command causes the instrument to beep when the waveform data exceeds the limits set in the limit test (LIMit:STATE must be on). Group Limit Test Related Commands LIMit:STATE Syntax 1 LIMit:BEEP {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 LIMit:BEEP? Arguments H OFF This argument disables the beep.
Page 401: Limit:compare
LIMit:COMpare Description This command resets the Limit Test comparison template. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax LIMit:COMpare {RESet} Arguments H RESet Resets the Limit template to ”None.” Example LIMit:COMpare RESet This command sets the Limit template to None. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 381 --...
Page 402: Limit:compare:ch
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x> Description This command sets or queries the template against which to compare the waveform acquired from the channel specified by x. The template can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations (REF1 through REF4 for four- -channel instruments or REF1 through REF2 for two- -channel instruments) or none.

Page 403: Limit:compare:math
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x> Description This command sets or queries the template against which to compare the math waveform specified by x, which can be 1 through 4. The tem- plate can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations (REF1 through REF4 for four- -channel instruments or REF1 through REF2 for two- -channel instruments) or none.

Page 404: Limit:compare:ref
LIMit:COMpare:REF<x> Description This command sets or queries the template against which to compare the reference waveform specified by x, which can be 1 through 4. The template can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations (REF1 through REF4 for four- -channel instruments or REF1 through REF2 for two- -channel instruments) or none.

Page 405: Limit:email
LIMit:EMail Description This command sets or queries whether an e- -mail is generated when the source waveform data exceeds the limits specified for the limit test. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:EMail {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 LIMit:EMail? Arguments H OFF This argument disables generating an e- -mail when the source wave- form exceeds the test limits.
Page 406: Limit:hardcopy
LIMit:HARDCopy Description This command sets or queries whether a hardcopy operation is executed on the waveform when any waveform data exceeds the limit set in the limit test. LIMit:STATE must be set to ON for the hardcopy operation to execute. The hardcopy operation uses the port and prints in the for- mat and layout specified by the HARDCopy commands.
Page 407: Limit:highlighthits
LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits Description This command sets or queries whether violation highlighting occurs when limit testing is active, and, if the RESET argument is set, clears the highlighting. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits {OFF|ON|RESET|<NR1>} Syntax 2 LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits? Arguments H OFF This argument disables violation highlighting when limit testing is active.
Page 408: Limit:lock
LIMit:LOCk Description This command sets or queries whether vertical scaling and positioning affect both source and template for template comparison pairs. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:LOCk {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 LIMit:LOCk? Arguments H OFF This argument disables the lock feature. H ON This argument enables the lock feature.
Page 409: Limit:log
LIMit:LOG Description This command sets or queries whether a log file is saved when the source waveform data exceeds the test limits. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:LOG {OFF|ON|NR1} Syntax 2 LIMit:LOG? Arguments H OFF This argument disables saving a log file when the source waveform exceeds the test limits.
Page 410: Limit:savewfm
LIMit:SAVEWFM Description This command sets or queries whether the source waveform is saved when the source waveform data exceeds the test limits. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:SAVEWFM {OFF|ON|NR1} Syntax 2 LIMit:SAVEWFM? Arguments H OFF This argument disables saving the source waveform when it exceeds the test limits.
Page 411: Limit:savwfm:filename
LIMit:SAVWFM:FILEName Description This command sets or queries the path where waveforms or log files will be saved when the waveform data exceeds the limits set by the lim- it test. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:SAVEWFM:FILEName {<string>} Syntax 2 LIMit:SAVEWFM:FILEName? Argument H <string>...
Page 412: Limit:srq
LIMit:SRQ Description This command sets or queries whether a Service Request Interrupt (SRQ) is generated when the waveform data falls outside of the test limits. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:SRQ {OFF|ON|NR1} Syntax 2 LIMit:SRQ? Arguments H OFF This argument disables generation of an SRQ when the waveform data falls outside of the limits set by the limit test.
Page 413: Limit:state
LIMit:STATE Description This command sets limit testing on or off or queries whether limit test- ing is in effect. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 LIMit:STATE? Arguments H OFF This argument disables limit testing. H ON This argument turns on limit testing of waveforms.
Page 414: Limit:stoponviolation
LIMit:STOPOnviolation Description This command sets or queries whether acquisitions are stopped when the waveform data exceeds the test limits. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:STOPOnviolation {OFF|ON|NR1} Syntax 2 LIMit:STOPOnviolation? Arguments H OFF This argument disables the stop on violation feature. H ON This argument enables the stop on violation feature so that when the waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, acquisitions are...
Page 415: Limit:template:store
LIMit:TEMPlate:STORe Description This command (no query form) saves the specified source waveform to the specified reference or file name. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax LIMit:TEMPLate:STORe <wfm>,{REF<x>|<file path>} Arguments H <wfm> This argument specifies the waveform that will be saved as the tem- plate.
Page 416: Limit:template:tolerance:horizontal
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal Description This command sets or queries the amount, in units of horizontal divi- sions, by which the source waveform is varied horizontally when creat- ing the destination waveform. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal <toler- ance> Syntax 2 LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal? Argument H <tolerance>...
Page 417: Limit:template:tolerance:vertical
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical Description This command sets or queries the amount, in units of vertical divisions, by which the source waveform is varied vertically when creating the destination waveform. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax 1 LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical <tolerance> Syntax 2 LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical? Argument H <tolerance>...
Page 418: Limit
LIMit? Description This query- -only command returns all settings for the Limit commands. Group Limit Test Related Commands Syntax LIMit? Example LIMit? This query might return: :LIMIT:BEEP 0;COMPARE:CH1 NONE;CH2 NONE;CH3 NONE;CH4 NONE;REF1 NONE;REF2 NONE;REF3 NONE;REF4 NONE;MATH1 NONE;MATH2 NONE;MATH3 NONE;MATH4 NONE;:LIMIT:HARDCOPY 0;STATE 0;TEM- PLATE:DESTINATION REF1;SOURCE CH2;TOLER- ANCE:HORIZONTAL 40.0000E-3;VERTICAL 40.0000E-3;:LIMIT:SRQ 0;STOPONVIOLATION 0;SA-...
Page 419: Lock
LOCk Description This command enables or disables all front- -panel buttons and knobs, including the touch screen. There is no front panel equivalent. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands UNLock Syntax 1 LOCk {ALL|NONe} Syntax 2 LOCk? Arguments H ALL This disables all front panel controls. H NONe This enables all front panel controls.
Page 420: Mask
MASK? Description This query- -only command returns the states of all settable mask param- eters Group Mask Syntax MASK? Example MASK? TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 400 --...
Page 421: Mask:autoadjust
MASK:AUTOAdjust Description This command optimizes signal position within the mask to minimize hits. It sets a mode so that the MASK:SOURCE waveform is compared against the mask and is shifted up, down, left, or right to minimize the hits. Group Mask Syntax MASK:AUTOAdjust {ON|OFF|<NR1>}...
Page 422: Mask:autoadjust:hdelta
MASK:AUTOAdjust:HDELTA Description This command sets or returns how far autofit searches horizontally. Autofit moves the waveform vertically and/or horizontally to reduce the number of hits within a given mask. If infinite or variable persistence is enabled, these movements will clear any persisted data. If Autofit makes frequent adjustments, there can be very little or even no per- sisted data displayed.
Page 423: Mask:autoadjust:vdelta
MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDELTA Description This command sets or returns how far autofit searches vertically. Autofit moves the waveform vertically and/or horizontally to reduce the number of hits within a given mask. If infinite or variable persistence is enabled, these movements will clear any persisted data. If Autofit makes frequent adjustments, there can be very little or even no per- sisted data displayed.
Page 424: Mask:autoset:autoadjust
MASK:AUTOSet:AUTOAdjust Description This command sets or returns whether the instrument settings are auto- matically matched to signal characteristics and specific mask require- ments. It controls what happens at the end of a mask autoset. If ON, the horz/vert auto adjustment is run ONCE to potentially improve the result of mask autoset.
Page 425: Mask:autoset:hpos
MASK:AUTOSet:HPOS Description This command controls whether the autoset algorithm will attempt to change the horizontal position of the signal while attempting to autoset. The default is ON. This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset function.
Page 426: Mask:autoset:hscale
MASK:AUTOSet:HSCAle Description This command controls whether the autoset algorithm will attempt to change the horizontal scale while attempting to autoset. This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset function.
Page 427: Mask:autoset:mode
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe Description This command controls whether or not an autoset will be automatically done after a standard mask is selected. The autoset will never happen if the standard mask is selected from GPIB, since a ”SET?” sent back to the scope should not do a mask autoset. The default value is: manual.
Page 428: Mask:autoset:offsetadj
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj Description This command sets autoset to not enforce the rule that, for pulse stan- dards, require 0V to be in a certain place in the mask. Instead, autoset will attempt to measure the DC offset in the signal and use scope offset or position controls to compensate for the DC offset in the signal.
Page 429: Mask:autoset:standard (Tds5000B Series Option Sm)
MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard (TDS5000B Series Option SM) Description This command selects the standard mask in autoset. This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset function. Group Mask Syntax 1 MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard {G703D1|E1Symmetri-...
Page 430 |RIO_RCV500M|RIO_RCV750M|RIO_RCV1G|RIO_RCV1_5G |RIO_RCV2G |RIO_SERIAL_1G|RIO_SERIAL_2G|RIO_SERIAL_3G |SFI5_XMITADATA2|SFI5_XMITCDATA2|SFI5_XMI- TACLK2 |SFI5_XMITCCLK2|SFI5_RCVBDATA2|SFI5_RCVDDATA2 |SFI5_RCVBCLK2|SFI5_RCVDCLK2|SFI5_XMITADATA3 |SFI5_XMITCDATA3|SFI5_XMITACLK3|SFI5_XMITCCLK3 |SFI5_RCVBDATA3|SFI5_RCVDDATA3|SFI5_RCVBCLK3 |SFI5_RCVDCLK3|VSROC192|TFI15_2|TFI5_3 |PCIEXPRESS_Xmit|PCIEXPRESS_Rcv} Syntax 2 MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard? Arguments H G703D1 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), DS1 Rate, 1.544 Mb/s) H E1Symmetrical (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E1 Sym Pair, 2.048 Mb/s) H E1Coax (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E1 Coax Pair, 2.048 Mb/s) H DS2RATESymmetrical (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), D2 Rate Sym, 6.312 Mb/s)
Page 431 H DS2 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS2, 6.312 Mb/s) H DS3 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS3, 44.736 Mb/s) H DS4NA (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS4NA, 139.26 Mb/s) H DS4NA_Max (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DSNA Max Output, 139.26 Mb/s) H STS1Pulse (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), STS-1 Pulse, 51.84 Mb/s) H STS1Eye (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), STS-1 Eye, 51.84 Mb/s) H STS3 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), STS-3,...
Page 432 H FC1063E_NBT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Beta, Transm) H FC1063E_NDT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Delta, Transm) H FC1063E_NGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Gamma, Transm) H FC1063E_ABT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Transm) H FC1063E_ADT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Transm) H FC1063E_AGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS...
Page 433 H OC48 (GR 253-CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000 OC1/STM16, 2.4883 Gb/s H OC48_FEC (Forward Error Correction - CSA8000 mask, 2.666 Gb/s) H INF2_5G (InfiniBand, IBTA Spec 1.0a, 2.5 Optical, 2.5 Gb/s) H INF2_5GE (InfiniBand, IBTA Spec 1.0a, 2.5 Electrical, 2.5 Gb/s) H ATATXG1 (Serial ATA, G1 Tx, 1.5 Gb/s) H ATATXG2 (Serial ATA, G2 Tx, 3.0 Gb/s) H ATATXG3 (Serial ATA, G3 Tx)
Page 434 H FW1394BS800B (IEEE 1394b, S800 Optical, 988.0 Mb/s) H FW1394BS1600B (IEEE 1394b, S1600 Opti- cal, 1.966 Gb/s) H USERMask H ENET1000BCX_NTP2 (1000B-CX Norm, TP2, 1.25 Gb/s) H ENET1000BCX_ATP2 (1000B-CX Abs, TP2, 1.25 Gb/s) H ENET1000BCX_ATP3 (1000B-CX Abs, TP3, 1.25 Gb/s) H ENETXAUI_Near (10 Gigabit Attachment Unit Interface (XAUI), Near, 3,125 Gb/s) H ENETXAUI_Far (10 Gigabit Attachment Unit...
Page 435 H RIO_SERIAL_3G (Rapid IO Serial, 3.25 Gb/s) H SFI5_XMITADATA2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) H SFI5_XMITCDATA2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) H SFI5_XMITACLK2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) H SFI5_XMITCCLK2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) H SFI5_RCVBDATA2 (SFI15 Receive: Test...
Page 436 Example 1 MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD E1COAX Selects the E1 Coax standard mask. Example 2 MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD? Might return :MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD E1COAX Indicating that the E1 Coax mask is selected as the current mask stan- dard. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 416 --...
Page 437: Mask:autoset:trigger
MASK:AUTOSet:TRIGger Description This command controls if a MASK:AUTOSet affects the trigger level. Other trigger settings such as type of trigger are not changed by MASK:AUTOSet. The default is ON. This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset function.
Page 438: Mask:autoset:vpos
MASK:AUTOSet:VPOS Description This command controls whether the autoset algorithm will affect the vertical position (or offset) of the signal while attempting to autoset. The default is ON. This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset function.
Page 439: Mask:autoset:vscale
MASK:AUTOSet:VSCAle Description This command controls whether the autoset algorithm will affect the vertical scale while attempting to autoset. This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset function. Group Mask Syntax MASK:AUTOSet:VSCAle {ON|OFF|<NR1>}...
Page 440: Mask:copy:user
MASK:COPy:USER Description This command copies the currently displayed mask to the User mask. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COPy:USER Example MASK:COPY:USER Copies the current mask to the user mask. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 420 --...
Page 441: Mask:count Reset
MASK:COUNt RESET Description This command resets to zero the number of hits for all mask segments on the specified source. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt RESET Example MASK:COUNT RESET Resets to zero the number of hits for all mask segments on the specified source.
Page 442: Mask:count:failures
MASK:COUNt:FAILURES? Description This command returns the number of pass/fail tests that have failed. The default is 0. To work pass/fail testing must be enabled. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt:FAILURES? Returns <NR1> Example MASK:COUNT:FAILURES? Might return 0 showing no tests have failed. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 422 --...
Page 443: Mask:count:hits
MASK:COUNt:HITS? Description This command returns the number of hits on all mask segments. To work, hit counting must be turned on. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt:HITS? Returns <NR1> Example MASK:COUNT:HITS? Might return: 0 Showing there were no hits from any source on all mask segments. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 423 --...
Page 444: Mask:count:seg:Hits
MASK:COUNt:SEG<m>:HITS? Description This command returns the number of hits in mask segment <m>. To work, hit counting must be turned on. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt:SEG<m>:HITS? Argument H <m> Is the mask segment number. Returns <NR1> Example MASK:COUNT:SEG1:HITS? Might return 0 showing there have been no hits.
Page 445: Mask:count:state
MASK:COUNt:STATE Description Sets or returns the mask hits count state. In other words, it controls whether or not mask counting is being done. MASK:DISplay must be ON to enable MASK:COUNt:STATE to count mask violations. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Arguments H ON Turns on mask counting.
Page 446: Mask:count:tests
MASK:COUNt:TESTS? Description Returns the number of pass/fail tests that have occurred. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt:TESTS? Returns <NR1> Example MASK:COUNT:TESTS? Might return: 50 showing 50 tests have occurred. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 426 --...
Page 447: Mask:count:total
MASK:COUNt:TOTal? Description Returns the sum of all hits in all mask segments. This command is the same as MASK:COUNT:HITS? And is kept for compatibility with oth- er Tektronix oscilloscopes. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt:TOTal? Returns <NR1> Example MASK:COUNT:TOTAL? Might return 50 Showing 50 hits have occurred.
Page 448: Mask:count:violations
MASK:COUNt:VIOLATIONS? Description This command returns the number of test violations that have occurred in the current pass/fail test. A test violation occurs when any part of a waveform falls within any mask segment. The default is 0. Group Mask Related Commands MASK:COUNt:TESTS?, MASK:COUNt:TOTal?, MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS?, MASK:TESt:REPeat Syntax,...
Page 449: Mask:count:waveforms
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS? Description This command returns the number of waveforms that have been ac- quired and processed during pass/fail testing. Group Mask Related Commands MASK:COUNt:TESTS?, MASK:COUNt:TOTal?, MASK:COUNt:VIOLATIONS? Syntax MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS? Returns <NR1> Example MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS? Might return: 1000 Showing 1,000 waveforms have been acquired and processed. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 429 --...
Page 450: Mask:display
MASK:DISplay Description Sets or returns whether or not defined masks are displayed on the screen. This is useful for temporarily turning off user defined masks without deleting them. It is also useful for removing a standard mask from the screen, but leaving it as the selected standard. Mask counting, mask testing, and mask autoset are not available if the mask display is Off.
Page 451: Mask:filter
MASK:FILTer Description This command sets or returns whether the selected digital filter will be run on the waveform data. The filter simulates optical hardware. That is, it simulates different hardware for each of several different optical standards. The digital filter runs on OC1, OC3, OC12, OC48, FC133, FC266, FC531, FC1063, FC2125Draft, Gigabit Ethernet, Infiniband 2.5Gb, 1394b, 393Mb, 786.4 3Mb, 1.572 Gb Group...
Page 452: Mask:highlighthits
MASK:HIGHLIGHTHits Description This command sets or returns whether or not hits in a mask are high- lighted in different colors than other waveform data. The default is On. Group Mask Syntax 1 MASK:HIGHLIGHTHits {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 MASK:HIGHLIGHTHits? Arguments H ON This enables the mask:highlighthits function.
Page 453: Mask:invert
MASK:INVert Description This command controls whether the mask is drawn inverted. It has no effect if this mask cannot be inverted. The default is Off (Positive). Group Mask Syntax MASK:INVert {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Arguments H ON Negative H OFF Positive H <NR1> A 0 disables the mask:invert function;...
Page 454: Mask:lock
MASK:LOCk Description This command sets or returns the mask lock to waveform mode. It locks the mask to the waveform such that changes to the horizontal and/ or vertical scale settings redraws the mask segments in proportion. This feature allows for expanding horizontal and/or vertical settings to zoom in on waveforms and masks to visually examine violation areas in more detail.
Page 455: Mask:margin:percent
MASK:MARgin:PERCent Description This command sets or queries the mask margin percentage. If you set a positive mask margin percentage, the polygon expands and the mask test will be more difficult to pass due to the expanded test area. If you set a negative mask margin percentage, the polygon shrinks and the mask test will be easier to pass due to the smaller area.
Page 456: Mask:margin:state
MASK:MARgin:STATE Description This command sets or returns the state of the mask margins. Group Mask Syntax MASK:MARgin:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Arguments H ON Turns on mask margins. H OFF Turns off mask margins. The currently displayed margined mask is erased and the original mask is displayed. H <NR1>...
Page 457: Mask:maskpre:amplitude
MASK:MASKPRE:AMPlitude Description This command sets or returns the current mask’s nominal pulse ampli- tude in volts. The query form of this command returns the nominal pulse amplitude of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask. Group Mask Related Commands...
Page 458: Mask:maskpre:hscale
MASK:MASKPRE:HSCAle Description This command sets or returns the nominal timing resolution used to draw the mask, in time/division. The query form of this command re- turns the nominal timing resolution of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask. Group Mask Related Commands...
Page 459: Mask:maskpre:htrigpos
MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS Description This command sets or returns the nominal trigger position.(pulse lead- ing edge) used to draw the mask as a fraction of the display width. The query form of this command returns the nominal trigger position of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Page 460: Mask:maskpre:patternbits
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS Description This command sets or returns the number of bits used for serial trigger for the User mask standard. For example, DS1 requires six bits,: four leading zeros, a one, and a trailing zero. The query form of this com- mand returns the serial bit value of the displayed mask.
Page 461: Mask:maskpre:presampbits
MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS Description This command sets or returns the number of bits before the (isolated one) pulse leading edge in the serial trigger pass/fail testing. For exam- ple, DS1 has four leading zeros. The query form of this command re- turns the presample bit value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Page 462: Mask:maskpre:recordlength
MASK:MASKPRE:RECOrdlength Description This command sets or returns the nominal record length for pulse mask testing. The query form of this command returns the record length val- ue of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask. Group Mask Syntax 1...
Page 463: Mask:maskpre:serialtrig
MASK:MASKPRE:SERIALTRIG Description This command sets or returns the type of triggering used in pass/fail testing of the current mask. Group Mask Related Commands MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS, MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMP- BITS Syntax 1 MASK:MASKPRE:SERIALTRIG {AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS|CMI|NRZ|MLT3|EDGE} Syntax 2 MASK:MASKPRE:SERIALTRIG? Argument H AMI Alternate Mark Inversion H HDB3 High- -Density Bipolar Three- -Bit substitution H B3ZS Bipolar 3 Zero Substitution...
Page 464: Mask:maskpre:trigtosamp
MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP Description This command sets or returns the time, in seconds, from the (leading edge) trigger position to the pulse bit sampling position. The query form of this command returns the time value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Page 465: Mask:maskpre:voffset
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSet Description This command sets or returns the nominal vertical offset, in volts, used to vertically offset the input channels. The query form of this command returns the offset value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask. Group Mask Related Commands...
Page 466: Mask:maskpre:vpos
MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS Description This command sets or returns the nominal vertical position, in divi- sions, used to vertically position the input channels. The query form of this command returns the vertical position value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Page 467: Mask:maskpre:vscale
MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle Description This command sets or returns the nominal vertical scale, in volts per division, used to vertically scale the input channels. The query form of this command returns the vertical scale value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Page 468: Mask:maskpre:width
MASK:MASKPRE:WIDth Description This command sets or returns the nominal bit width in seconds. The query form of this command returns the bit width value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (dis- played) mask. Group Mask Related Commands...
Page 469: Mask:polarity
MASK:POLarity Description This command sets or returns the input waveform polarity for the pass/ fail test. It controls whether to test positive pulse, negative pulse, or both during pass/fail testing. This command only applies when MASK:TESt:STATE is on. Group Mask Related Commands MASK:TESt:STATE Syntax 1...
Page 470: Mask:seg Delete
MASK:SEG<m> DELEte Description This command deletes the specified mask segment from the Current mask. Group Mask Syntax MASK:SEG<m> DELEte Arguments H <m> Is an integer that specifies the mask segment number to delete from the Current mask. Example MASK:SEG3 DELETE Deletes mask segment three from the Current mask.
Page 471: Mask:seg:Nr_Pt
MASK:SEG<m>:NR_Pt? Description This command returns the number of points that make up the specified mask segment of the Current mask. Each mask point consists of an X- -Y pair of coordinates. Group Mask Syntax MASK:SEG<m>:NR_Pt? Arguments H <m> Is an integer number that specifies a mask segment number of the Current mask.
Page 472: Mask:seg:Points
MASK:SEG<m>:POINTS Description This command sets or returns the X- -Y user coordinates of all points in the Current mask segment. The set form defines new points in the Cur- rent mask, replacing any existing points in the Current mask segment. In other words, it sets or returns the vertices for a particular segment in the Current mask.
Page 473: Mask:source
MASK:SOUrce Description This command sets or reports which source will be compared against the mask(s) when counting is turned on. In other words, it controls which trace to use in mask counting. It also affects mask autoset and how triggering is set up when you select the mask. Group Mask Syntax 1...
Page 474: Mask:standard (Tds5000B Series Option Sm)
Note: There are several available mask standards that require a higher bandwidth than permitted for TDS5000B Series instruments. In such cases, a warning is posted to the standard event system upon selection of any of these standards. To ensure that the mask you select is fully supported by the instrument, always check the event status register after selecting a mask standard.
Page 475 |FC4250E_ADR|FC4250E_ADT|FC4250E_AGR |FC4250E_AGT|FC4250E_NBT|FC4250E_NDT |FC4250E_NGT|FC531|FC531E|FST1|FST2|FST3 |FST4|FST5|FST6|FW1394BS1600B| FW1394BS1600BT1|FW1394BS1600BT2|FW1394BS400B|F W1394BS400BT1| FW1394BS400BT2|FW1394BS800B|FW1394BS800BT1|FW1 394BS800BT2| G703DS1|G703DS3|HST1|HST2|HST3|HST4|HST5|HST6| INF2_5G| INF2_5GE|NONe|OC1|OC12|OC3|OC48|OC48_FEC|PCIEX- PRESS_Rcv| PCIEX- PRESS_Xmit|RATE32Mbit|RATE97Mbit|RIO_DRV1G|RIO _DRV1_5G| RIO_DRV2G|RIO_DRV500M|RIO_DRV500M|RIO_DRV750M| RIO_EDRV1G| RIO_EDRV1_5G|RIO_EDRV2G|RIO_EDRV500M|RIO_EDRV5 00M| RIO_EDRV750M|RIO_RCV1G|RIO_RCV1_5G|RIO_RCV2G|R IO_RCV500M| RIO_RCV500M|RIO_RCV750M|RIO_SERIAL_1G|RIO_SE- RIAL_2G|RIO_SERIAL_3G| SFI5_RCVBCLK2|SFI5_RCVBCLK3|SFI5_RCVBDA- TA2|SFI5_RCVBDATA3| SFI5_RCVDCLK2|SFI5_RCVDCLK3|SFI5_RCVDDA- TA2|SFI5_RCVDDATA3| SFI5_XMITACLK2|SFI5_XMITACLK3|SFI5_XMITADA- TA2|SFI5_XMITADATA3| SFI5_XMITCCLK2|SFI5_XMITCCLK3|SFI5_XMITCDA- TA2|SFI5_XMITCDATA3| STM0_0|STM0_1|STM0_HDBX|STM1E_1|STM1E_0|STS1Ey e|STS1Pulse| STS3|STS3_Max|TFI5_2|TFI5_3|USERMask|VID- EO270|VIDEO360|VSROC192} Syntax 2 MASK:STANdard? Arguments H ATARXG1 (Serial ATA, G1 Rx 1.5 Gb/s) H ATARXG2 (Serial ATA, G2, Rx, 3.0 Gb/s) H ATARXG3 (Serial ATA, G3, Rx) H ATATXG1 (Serial ATA, G1 Tx, 1.5 Gb/s)
Page 476 H DS0Contra H DS0Double H DS0Single H DS0Timing H DS1 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1, 1.544 Mb/s) H DS1A (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1A, 2.048 Mb/s) H DS1C (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1C, 3.152 Mb/s) H DS2 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS2, 6.312 Mb/s) H DS2RATECoax (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), D2 Rate Coax, 6.312 Mb/s) H DS2RATESymmetrical (ITU-T, G703 (10/98),...
Page 477 H ENET1250 (IEEE Std 802.3 and ANSI X3.263-1995, GB Ethernet, 1.25 Gb/s) H ENETXAUI_Far (10 Gigabit Attachment Unit Interface (XAUI), Far, 3.125 Gb/s) H ENETXAUI_Near (10 Gigabit Attachment Unit Interface (XAUI), Near, 3,125 Gb/s) H FC133 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Optical, 132.8 Mb/s) H FC133E (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Electrical 132.8 Mb/s)
Page 478 H FC2125 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Optical, 2.125) H FC2125E_ABT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Transm) H FC2125E_ADT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Delta, Transm) H FC2125E_AGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Gamma, Transm) H FC2125E_NBT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Beta, Transm) H FC2125E_NDT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Delta, Transm)
Page 479 H FW1394BS400BT2 (IEEE 1394b, S400b T2, 491.5 Mb/s) H FW1394BS800B (IEEE 1394b, S800 Optical, 988.0 Mb/s) H FW1394BS800BT1 (IEEE 1394b, S800b T1, 983.0 Mb/s) H FW1394BS800BT2 (IEEE 1394b, S800b T2, 983.0 Mb/s) H FW1394BS1600B (IEEE 1394b, S1600 Optical, 1.966 Gb/s) H FW1394BS1600BT1 (IEEE 1394b, S1600b T1, 1.966 Gb/s) H FW1394BS1600BT2 (IEEE 1394b, S1600b T2, 1.966...
Page 480 H PCIEXPRESS_Rcv (PCI Express Receiver, 2.5 Gb/s) H RATE32Mbit (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), 32.064 Mb/s) H RATE97Mbit (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), 97 Mbit, 97.728 Mb/s) H RIO_DRV1G (Rapid IO Driver, 1 Gb/s) H RIO_DRV1_5G (Rapid IO Driver, 5 Gb/s) H RIO_DRV2G (Rapid IO Driver, 2 Gb/s) H RIO_DRV500M (Rapid IO Driver, 500 Mb/s) H RIO_DRV750M (Rapid IO Driver, 750 Mb/s) H RIO_EDRV1G (Rapid IO Extended Driver, 1 Gb/s)
Page 481 H SFI5_RCVDCLK2 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point D Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) H SFI5_XMITADATA3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A Data Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s) H SFI5_XMITCDATA3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C Data Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s) H SFI5_XMITACLK3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A Clock Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s) H SFI5_XMITCCLK3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C Clock Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
Page 482 Example 1 MASK:STANDARD E1COAX Selects the E1 Coax standard mask. Example 2 MASK:STANDARD? Might return :MASK:STANDARD E1COAX Indicating that the E1 Coax mask is selected as the current mask stan- dard. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 462 --...
Page 483: Mask:stoponviolation
MASK:STOPOnviolation Description This command sets or returns the stop on violation setting. When en- abled, this command stops waveform acquisitions on the first occur- rence of a waveform violation. MASK:DISplay must be ON for the oscilloscope to detect violations. In other words, it controls whether the pass/fail test stops running when a violation is detected.
Page 484: Mask:test:aux:completion
MASK:TESt:AUX:COMPLetion Description This command sets or returns the test:aux on pass/fail test completion mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to send a TTL signal out the Aux:Out port when the mask pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’. In other words, this command controls whether or not a TTL signal is sent out the AuxOut port on completion of the pass/ fail test.
Page 485: Mask:test:aux:failure
MASK:TESt:AUX:FAILure Description This command sets or returns the test:aux status on pass/fail test failure mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to send a TTL signal out the AuxOut port when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’. In other words, it sends the signal when a failure occurs dur- ing the mask pass/fail test.
Page 486: Mask:test:beep:completion
MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPLetion Description This command sets or returns the beep on pass/fail test completion mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to emit a tone when the mask pass/fail test completes. Group Mask Syntax 1 MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPLetion {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPLetion? Arguments H ON Turns on the pass/fail beep on completion.
Page 487: Mask:test:beep:failure
MASK:TESt:BEEP:FAILure Description This command sets or returns the beep status on pass/fail test failure mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to emit a tone when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failed’. In other words, it sounds the bell when a failure occurs during the mask pass/fail test. Group Mask Syntax 1...
Page 488: Mask:test:delay
MASK:TESt:DELay Description This command sets or returns the amount of time, in seconds, to wait after starting pass/fail testing to evaluate waveforms. This is useful if the test system requires ‘settling’ time prior to evaluating waveforms. Group Mask Syntax 1 MASK:TESt:DELay <NR3>...
Page 489: Mask:test:hardcopy
MASK:TESt:HARDCopy Description This command sets or returns the hard copy in pass/fail failure mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to generate a screen hard copy, using the current oscilloscope hard copy settings, as soon as the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’. In other words, it prints the screen to the default printer.
Page 490: Mask:test:log:failure
MASK:TESt:LOG:FAILure Description This command sets or returns the log status on pass/fail test failure mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to log the current date and time to a file when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Fail- ing’. The file name is determined from the current date and time. The user cannot change this name.
Page 491: Mask:test:repeat
MASK:TESt:REPeat Description This command sets or returns the repeat pass/fail test on completion mode. When enabled, this command repeats the pass/fail test cycle at the completion of the previous test cycle. Group Mask Related Commands MASK:COUNt:VIOLATIONS? Syntax 1 MASK:TESt:REPeat {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 MASK:TESt:REPeat? Arguments...
Page 492: Mask:test:sample
MASK:TESt:SAMple Description This command sets or returns the minimum number of waveform data- base (WfmDB) points the oscilloscope can acquire before it stops a single sequence acquisition or stops running a mask test. Hint: a bigger sample size may allow a greater throughput (more wave- forms to get acquired at a time).
Page 493: Mask:test:sample:threshold
MASK:TESt:SAMple:THReshold Description This command sets or returns the minimum number of hits in mask regions needed to cause the pass/fail status to change from PASSING to FAILING. This affects the mask test when the oscilloscope is acquiring in waveform database (WfmDB) mode. Group Mask Syntax 1...
Page 494: Mask:test:savewfm
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM Description This command sets or returns the save waveform to file on failure set- ting. When enabled, this command copies waveform data from active channels to files when the pass/fail test status changes to ‘Failing’. Note: This oscilloscope saves files only on the first violation that causes the pass/fail test to fail.
Page 495: Mask:test:savewfm:filename
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM:FILEName Description This command sets or returns the name of the directory and file to use with the MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM command. It defines the directory the files will be put in (name comes from date and time). Group Mask Related Commands MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM, MASK:TESt:LOG:FAILure Syntax 1 MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM:FILEName <Qstring>...
Page 496: Mask:test:srq:completion
MASK:TESt:SRQ:COMPLetion Description This command sets or returns an SRQ on pass/fail test completion mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to send a GPIB SRQ command when the mask pass/fail test completes. Group Mask Syntax 1 MASK:TESt:SRQ:COMPLetion {OFF|ON|<NR1>} Syntax 2 MASK:TESt:SRQ:COMPLetion? Arguments H ON...
Page 497: Mask:test:srq:failure
MASK:TESt:SRQ:FAILure Description This command sets or returns the SRQ status on pass/fail test failure mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to send a GPIB SRQ command when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’. In other words, it sends an SRQ when a failure occurs during the mask pass/fail test.
Page 498: Mask:test:state
MASK:TESt:STATE Description This command sets or returns the state of mask pass/fail testing. When enabled, this command resets the pass/fail status information and starts pass/fail mask testing. This command also generates an ‘Operation Complete’ message when pass/fail testing completes. Refer to BUSY? And *OPC commands for information on synchronizing a controller with pass/fail testing.
Page 499: Mask:test:status
MASK:TESt:STATUS? Description This command returns the pass/fail test status. This command returns one of: OFF, DELAY, PASSING, FAILING, PASSED, FAILED, and VIOLATION. In other words, it indicates the result of the pass/fail test. When the violation count exceeds the violation threshold, the status changes from Passing to Failed.
Page 500: Mask:test:stop:failure
MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure Description This command sets or returns the stop status on pass/fail test failure mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to stop acquiring data when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’. In other words, it stops when a failure occurs during the mask pass/fail test. Re- peat- -on- -completion mode has no effect.
Page 501: Mask:test:threshold
MASK:TESt:THReshold Description This command sets or returns the number of failed tested waveforms needed in each pass/fail test to cause the pass/fail status to change from PASSING to FAILING. Group Mask Syntax 1 MASK:TESt:THReshold <NR1> Syntax 2 MASK:TESt:THReshold? Argument H <NR1> Is an integer that represents the number of tested waveform violations occurring in each pass/fail test needed to change the pass/fail status to FAILING.
Page 502: Mask:test:waveform
MASK:TESt:WAVEform Description This command sets or returns the number of waveforms to test during pass/fail testing. If Averaging is on, this is the number of averaged wa- veforms to test during pass/fail testing. In other words, it specifies the number of waveforms to be acquired in counting the mask hits in the pass/fail test.
Page 503: Mask:user:amplitude
MASK:USER:AMPlitude Description This command sets or returns the current mask’s nominal pulse ampli- tude in volts. The query form of this command returns the nominal pulse amplitude of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask. Group Mask Related Commands...
Page 504: Mask:user:bitrate
MASK:USER:BITRate Description This command sets or returns the bit rate for the user mask. Group Mask Syntax 1 MASK:USER:BITRate <NR1> Syntax 2 MASK:USER:BITRate? Argument H <NR1> This is a number that sets the bit rate of the user mask in bits per sec- ond.
Page 505: Mask:user:hscale
MASK:USER:HSCAle Description This command sets or returns the nominal timing resolution used to draw the mask, in time/division. The query form of this command re- turns the nominal timing resolution of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Page 506: Mask:user:htrigpos
MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS Description This command sets or returns the nominal trigger position.(pulse lead- ing edge) used to draw the mask as a fraction of the display width. The query form of this command returns the nominal trigger position of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Page 507: Mask:user:label
MASK:USER:LABel Description This command sets or queries the label assigned to a user mask. This label is displayed in the upper left- -hand corner of the graticule when a user mask is selected. Group Mask Syntax 1 MASK:USER:LABel <string> Syntax 2 MASK:USER:LABel? Arguments H <string>...
Page 508: Mask:user:patternbits
MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS Description This command sets or returns the number of bits used for serial trigger for the User mask standard. For example, DS1 requires six bits,: four leading zeros, a one, and a trailing zero. The query form of this com- mand returns the serial bit value of the displayed mask.
Page 509: Mask:user:presampbits
MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS Description This command sets or returns the number of bits before the (isolated one) pulse leading edge in the serial trigger pass/fail testing. For exam- ple, DS1 has four leading zeros. The query form of this command re- turns the presample bit value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (dis- played) mask.
Page 510: Mask:user:recordlength
MASK:USER:RECOrdlength Description This command sets or returns the nominal record length for pulse mask testing. The query form of this command returns the record length val- ue of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask. Group Mask Syntax 1...
Page 511: Mask:user:seg Delete
MASK:USER:SEG<m> DELEte Description This command deletes the specified mask segment from the User mask, whether or not the User mask is the current mask. Group Mask Syntax MASK:USER:SEG<m> DELEte Arguments H <m> Is an integer that specifies the User mask segment number to delete from the User mask.
Page 512: Mask:user:seg:Nr_Pt
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:NR_Pt? Description This command returns the number of points that make up the specified User mask segment. Each mask point consists of an X- -Y pair of coor- dinates. Group Mask Syntax MASK:USER:SEG<m>:NR_Pt? Arguments H <m> Is an integer number that specifies a User mask segment number. Returns <NR1>...
Page 513: Mask:user:seg:Points
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:POINTS Description This command sets or returns the X- -Y user coordinates of all points in the specified User mask segment. The set form defines new points in the User mask, replacing any existing points in the specified User mask segment.
Page 514: Mask:user:trigtosamp
MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP Description This command sets or returns the time, in seconds, from the (leading edge) trigger position to the pulse bit sampling position. The query form of this command returns the time value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Page 515: Mask:user:voffset
MASK:USER:VOFFSet Description This command sets or returns the nominal vertical offset, in volts, used to vertically offset the input channels. The query form of this command returns the offset value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (dis- played) mask.
Page 516: Mask:user:vpos
MASK:USER:VPOS Description This command sets or returns the nominal vertical position, in divi- sions, used to vertically position the input channels. The query form of this command returns the vertical position value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Page 517: Mask:user:vscale
MASK:USER:VSCAle Description This command sets or returns the nominal vertical scale, in volts per division, used to vertically scale the input channels. The query form of this command returns the vertical scale value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Page 518: Mask:user:width
MASK:USER:WIDth Description This command sets or returns the nominal bit width in seconds. The query form of this command returns the bit width value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, re- gardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Page 519: Math:Define
MATH<x>:DEFIne Description This command allows you to define new waveforms using mathemati- cal expressions. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Math Setup from the Math menu, selecting a math waveform (Math 1 through Math 4 for 4- -channel models or Math 1 through Math 2 for 2- -channel models), and then entering a math expression in the Math<x>...
Page 520 Example 2 MATH2:DEFIne? This query might return :MATH1:DEFINE ”CH2*REF2” as the expression that defines Math 1. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 500 --...
Page 521: Math:Label:name
MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe Description This command sets or returns the label string, which is used for anno- tating the math waveform on the screen. The math waveform to which the label is attached is specified by x, which ranges in value from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 522: Math:Label:xpos
MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS Description This command sets or queries the X screen offset at which the label attached to a math waveform is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen. Channels are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instru- ments.
Page 523: Math:Label:ypos
MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS Description This command sets or queries the Y screen offset at which the label attached to a math waveform is displayed, relative to the top edge of the screen. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 524: Math:Numavg
MATH<x>:NUMAVg Description This command sets or returns the acquisition number at which the aver- aging algorithm will begin exponential averaging. Prior to that acquisi- tion number, the algorithm uses stable averaging. This has no affect unless the AVG() function is used in the specified math expression. If so, it affects all AVG() functions in this math expression.
Page 525: Math:Spectral
MATH<x>:SPECTral? Description This query- -only command returns the current spectral setups for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and viewing the current spectral setup values.
Page 526: Math:Spectral:center
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER Description This command specifies or returns the center frequency of the spectral analyzer output data span for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- - channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and then entering a Center Freq value.
Page 527: Math:Spectral:gatepos
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS Description This command sets or returns the position of the center of the gate, which is used as the data input to the spectral analyzer for the specified math waveform. The math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- - channel instruments.This command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and then entering a Gate Pos value.
Page 528: Math:Spectral:gatewidth
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH Description This command sets or returns the gate width input, in seconds, to the spectral analyzer for the specified math waveform. The math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel in- struments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and enter- ing a duration value in the Gate Dur box.
Page 529: Math:Spectral:lock
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk Description This command locks menus for two or more math waveforms together as a group. The query form of this command returns an ON (1) or OFF (0), indicating whether spectral locking is turned on. This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Control tab and then clicking the Time/Track Frequency Domain Con- trols button associated with the math waveforms that you want to lock.
Page 530 Example 1 MATH1:SPECTral:LOCk ON This command turns on the parameter lock for Math1, which causes the parameters for Math1 and Math2 to be locked together. Example 2 MATH1:SPECTral:LOCk? This query might return :MATH1:SPECTRAL:LOCK 0 indicating that the parameter lock for Math1 is turned off. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 510 --...
Page 531: Math:Spectral:mag
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG Description This command sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag function in the math string. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- - channel instruments.
Page 532: Math:Spectral:phase
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE Description This command sets or returns the units of a SpectralPhase function in the math string. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- - channel instruments.This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Phase tab, and then clicking the de- sired Scale button.
Page 533: Math:Spectral:reflevel
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel Description This command specifies the vertical position of the output data from the spectral analyzer on the display screen for the specified math wave- form. The numerical value represents the position at the top of the dis- play graticule. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- - channel instruments.
Page 534: Math:Spectral:refleveloffset
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset Description This command sets or returns the spectral level offset used for calculat- ing the dB value for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel in- struments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 535 Example 3 MATH1:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset? This query might return :MATH1:SPECTRAL:REFLEVELOFFSET 2.23360E-01 indicating that the spectral reference level offset is 223.6 mV. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 515 --...
Page 536: Math:Spectral:resbw
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw Description This command sets or returns the resolution bandwidth of the spectral analyzer for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is spe- cified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instru- ments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and then entering a value in the Res BW box.
Page 537: Math:Spectral:span
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN Description This command sets the ceiling of the span to a value that is closest to the specified value. The query form of this command returns the current span value for specified math waveform. The Math waveform is speci- fied by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and then entering a value...
Page 538 Example 3 MATH1:SPECTral:SPAN? This query might return :MATH1:SPECTRAL:SPAN 1.2500E+09 indicating the actual span value obtained by the spectral analyzer. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 518 --...
Page 539: Math:Spectral:suppress
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress Description This command sets or returns the phase suppression threshold for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments. This command is equal to selecting Spec- tral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Phase tab and then enter- ing a value in the Suppression Threshold box.
Page 540: Math:Spectral:unwrap
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap Description This command sets or returns whether phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer output data is enabled for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instru- ments.This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Phase tab and then clicking the Unwrap button.
Page 541: Math:Spectral:window
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow Description This command sets or returns the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input data for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- - channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments. A spectral window determines what the filter shape of the spectral analyz- er will be in the frequency domain.
Page 542 H GAUSSIAN This type of window function has the best localization characteristics in the joint time/frequency plane. H TEKEXPONENTIAL This type of window has an exponential nonsymmetrical shape in the time domain and a triangular shape in the frequency domain. H FLATTOP2 This type of window function is a cosine series window with a flat- tened frequency response lobe.
Page 543: Math:Unitstring
MATH<x>:UNITString Description This command sets or queries the string to use for units for the math waveform specified by x, which can be 1 through 4. This command will override the default unit string with the one that you specify. Group Math Syntax 1...
Page 544: Math:Vertical:position
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition Description This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified Math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- - channel instruments. The position value is usually applied to the signal before it is digitized.
Page 545 Argument H <NR3> This is the desired position in divisions from the center graticule. Example 1 MATH2:VERTical:POSition 1.3E+00 This command positions the Math 2 input signal 1.3 divisions higher than a position of 0. Example 2 MATH1:VERTical:POSition? This query might return :MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION -1.3000E+00 This indicates that the current position of Math 1 is 1.3 divisions below the center graticule.
Page 546: Math:Vertical:scale
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle Description This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Math menu and then entering a Vert Scale value or adjusting the front- -panel Vertical SCALE knob.
Page 547 Example 1 MATH4:VERTical:SCAle 100E-03 This command sets the Math 4 scale to 100 mV per division. Example 2 CH2:VERTical:SCAle? This query might return :MATH2:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000E+00 This indicates that the current scale setting of Math 2 is 1 V per divi- sion.
Page 548: Mathvar:var
MATHVAR:VAR<x> Description This command sets or queries up to 8 different numerical values you can use within math expressions. These values can range from - -9.9e37 to 9.9e37; the default values are 0.0. <x> specifies the location, 1 through 8, in which you can store values. Stored math variables can be reference within math expressions as VAR1, VAR2,...VAR8.

Page 549: Math
MATH<x>? Description This query- -only command returns the definition for the math wave- form specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 4 in four- -channel instruments and 1 through 2 in two- -channel instruments. Group Math Related Commands SELect:<wfm> Syntax MATH<x>? Example...

Page 550: Measurement:gating
MEASUrement:GATing Description This command specifies or returns the measurement gating setting. This command is equivalent to selecting Gating from the Measure menu and then clicking the desired Measurement Gating setting. Group Measurement Syntax 1 MEASUrement:GATing {ON|OFF|<NR1>|ZOOM|CURSOR} Syntax 2 MEASUrement:GATing? Arguments H ON This turns on measurement gating.
Page 551: Measurement:immed
MEASUrement:IMMed? Description This query- -only command returns all immediate measurement setup parameters. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:IMMed? Example MEASUrement:IMMed? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE; UNITS ”V”;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1; SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE; :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE PULSE; :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE; EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS; :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT; ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2 0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLE- VEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW 10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:METHOD...
Page 552: Measurement:immed:delay
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? Description This query- -only command returns information about the immediate delay measurement. This command is equivalent to selecting Measure- ment Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab and then clicking the Delay button. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? Example MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? This query might return...
Page 553: Measurement:immed:delay:direction
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction Description This command sets or returns the starting point and direction that deter- mines the delay ”to” edge when taking an immediate delay measure- ment. Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 command to specify the delay ”to” waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Mea- surement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab, click- ing the Delay button to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Search Direction setting.
Page 554: Measurement:immed:delay:edge[1]
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1] Description This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay ”from” waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement. Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1 command to specify the waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Set- up from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Delay Edge1 setting.
Page 555: Measurement:immed:delay:edge2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 Description This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay ”to” waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement. Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 command to specify the waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Set- up from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Delay Edge2 setting.
Page 556: Measurement:immed:noise (Tds5000B Series Option Sm)
MEASUrement:IMMed:NOISe (TDS5000B Series option SM) Description This command sets or queries whether the noise measurement is made on the high or low level of the waveform. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Ref Levs > Eye > Top Level or Base Level in the Comm tab of the Measurement Setup dialog box.
Page 557: Measurement:immed:reflevel:absolute:high
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH Description This command sets or queries the high reference level, and is the upper reference level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of rise and fall measurements. Group Measurement Related Commands MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod Syntax 1 MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH <NR3>...
Page 558: Measurement:immed:reflevel:absolute:low
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW Description This command sets or queries the low reference level, and is the zero percent level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of rise and fall measurements. Related Commands MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod Group Measurement Syntax 1 MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW <NR3>...
Page 559: Measurement:immed:reflevel:absolute:mid[1]
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] Description This command sets or queries the mid reference level, and is the 50% reference level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements. Group Measurement Related Commands MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod Syntax 1...
Page 560: Measurement:immed:reflevel:absolute:mid2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 Description This command sets or queries the mid reference level for the ”to” wa- veform when taking a delay measurement, and is the 50% reference level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Abso- lute. Note that this command affects the results of delay measurements. Group Measurement Related Commands...
Page 561: Measurement:immed:reflevel:method
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METhod Description This command specifies or queries the reference level units used for measurement calculations. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then choosing the de- sired reference level from the Units group box. Group Measurement Syntax 1...
Page 562: Measurement:immed:reflevel:percent:high
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH Description This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the high reference level when MEASUre- ment:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that this com- mand affects the results of rise and fall measurements. Group Measurement Related Commands...
Page 563: Measurement:immed:reflevel:percent:low
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW Description This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the low reference level when MEASUre- ment:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that this com- mand affects the results of rise and fall measurements. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then entering the Percentage Low Ref value.
Page 564: Measurement:immed:reflevel:percent:mid[1]
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] Description This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the mid reference level when MEASUre- ment:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that this com- mand affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic mea- surements.
Page 565: Measurement:immed:reflevel:percent:mid2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 Description This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the mid reference level for the second wave- form specified when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that this command affects the results of delay measure- ments.
Page 566: Measurement:immed:reflevel
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel? Description This query- -only command returns the reference level settings for the immediate measurement. It returns them in the following order: ABSO- LUTE and then PERCENT for individual user measurements. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel? Example MEASUREMENT:IMMed:REFLEVEL? TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 546 --...
Page 567: Measurement:source:Sigtype (Tds5000B Series Option Sm)
MEASUrement:SOURCE<x>:SIGType (TDS5000B Series option SM) Description This command sets or queries the type of input signal used for measure- ment SOURCE<x>, 1 or 2. To ensure accurate measurements, use this command to specify the in- put- -signal type for the measurement source.
Page 568: Measurement:immed:source[1]
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1] Description This command sets or queries the source for all single channel immedi- ate measurements and specifies the source to measure ”from” when taking an immediate delay measurement or phase measurement. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Mea- sure menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Source1 (From) setting.
Page 569 Example 2 MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1 CH3 indicating that channel 3 is the immediate measurement source. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 549 --...
Page 570: Measurement:immed:source2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 Description This command sets or queries the source to measure ”to” for phase or delay immediate measurements. This command is equivalent to select- ing Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Source2 (To) setting.
Page 571 Example 2 MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 MATH1 indicating that Math1 is the immediate measurement source. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 551 --...
Page 572 MEASurement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>:SIGType (TDS5000B Series option SM) Description This command sets or queries the type of input signal used for measure- ment SOURCE<x>, 1 or 2. To ensure accurate measurements, use this command to specify the in- put- -signal type for the measurement source.
Page 573: Measurement:immed:type
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe Description This command sets or queries the immediate measurement type. Group Measurement Syntax 1 MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPE {AMPlitude|AREa| BURst|CARea|CMEan|CRMs|DELay|DISTDUty| EXTINCTDB|EXTINCTPCT|EXTINCTRATIO| EYEHeight|EYEWidth|FALL|FREQuency|HIGH| HITs|LOW|MAXimum|MEAN|MEDian|MINImum| NCROss|NDUty|NOVershoot|NWIdth|PBASe| PCROss|PCTCROss|PDUty|PEAKHits|PERIod| PHAse|PK2Pk|PKPKJitter|PKPKNoise| POVershoot|PTOT|PWIdth|QFACtor|RISe| RMS|RMSJitter|PMSNoise|SIGMA1|SIGMA2| SIGMA3|SIXSigmajit|SNRatio|STDdev| UNDEFINED|WAVEFORMS} Syntax 2 MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe? Arguments H AMPlitude This measures the amplitude of the selected waveform. In other words, it measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Page 574 H CRMs This measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region. H DELay This measures the time between the middle reference (default = 50%) amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination wave- form.
Page 575 H FALL This measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value (de- fault is 90%) to a low reference value (default is 10%). H FREQuency This measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region.
Page 576 H NCROss This (timing measurement) measures the time from the trigger point to the first falling edge of the waveform or gated region. The distance (time) is measured at the middle reference amplitude point of the sig- nal. H NDUty The negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period, expressed as a percentage.
Page 577 H PHAse This measures the phase difference (amount of time a waveform leads or lags the reference waveform) between two waveforms. The mea- surement is made between the middle reference points of the two wa- veforms and is expressed in degrees, where 360° represents one wave- form cycle.
Page 578 H RMSJitter This measures the variance in the time locations of the cross point. The RMS jitter is defined as one standard deviation at the cross point. H RMSNoise This measures the Root Mean Square noise amplitude on a waveform at the mid reference level.
Page 579 This query might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPe RMS indicating that the immediate measurement is the true Root Mean Square voltage. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 559 --...
Page 580: Measurement:immed:units
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? Description This query- -only command returns the units of the immediate measure- ment. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? Example MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNIts ”s” indicating that units for the immediate measurement are in seconds. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 560 --...
Page 581: Measurement:immed:value
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? Description This query- -only command returns the value of the measurement speci- fied by the MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe command. The measurement is immediately taken on the source(s) specified by a MEASUre- ment:IMMed:SOURCE command. Note: A change to HORizontal:MAIn:SCALe or CH<x>:SCALe will not necessarily have taken affect if followed by this command.
Page 582: Measurement:meas:Count
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt? Description This query- -only command returns the number of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset. Some values may have been ignored because they generated an error. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Group Measurement Syntax...
Page 583: Measurement:meas:Maximum
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum? Description This query- -only command returns the maximum value found for this measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum? Example MEASUrement:MEAS3:MAXimum? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:MAXIMUM 4.18E-9.
Page 584: Measurement:meas:Mean
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN? Description This query- -only command returns the mean value accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN? Example MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEAN? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN 514.71E-09.
Page 585: Measurement:meas:Minimum
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum? Description This query- -only command returns the minimum value found for this measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum? Example MEASUrement:MEAS1:MINImum? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MINIMUM 1.75E-09.
Page 586: Measurement:meas:Noise (Tds5000B Series Option Sm)
MEASURement:MEAS<x>:NOISe (TDS5000B Series option SM) Description This command sets or queries whether the noise measurement is made on the high or low level of the waveform. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Ref Levs > Eye > Top Level or Base Level in the Comm tab of the Measurement Setup dialog box.
Page 587: Measurement:meas:Stddev
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev? Description This query- -only command returns the standard deviation of values ac- cumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset. Measure- ments are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev? Example MEASUrement:MEAS1:STDdev? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV 21.0E-12.
Page 588: Measurement:meas:Delay:direction
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction Description This command sets or queries the starting point and direction that deter- mines the delay ”to” edge when taking a delay measurement. Use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 command to specify the wave- form. This command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure menu, choosing Delay from the drop- -down list and then clicking the desired Search Direction setting.
Page 589: Measurement:meas:Delay:edge[1]
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1] Description This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay ”from” waveform when taking a delay measurement. Use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] command to specify the wa- veform. This command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Mea- sure menu, choosing Delay from the drop- -down list and clicking the desired Delay Edge1 setting.
Page 590 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 Description This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay ”to” waveform when taking a delay measurement. Use the MEA- SUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 command to specify the waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure menu, choosing Delay from the drop- -down list and then clicking the desired Delay Edge2 setting.
Page 591: Measurement:meas:Delay
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? Description This query- -only command returns the delay measurement parameters for the measurement specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 8. Measurement parameters are presented in the following order: Edge1, Edge2, and Direction. This query command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure menu, choosing Delay and viewing the Delay Edge and Search Direction settings.
Page 592: Measurement:meas:Reflevel:absolute:high
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH Description This command sets or queries the high reference level, and is the upper reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Note: This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements Group Measurement Related Commands...
Page 593: Measurement:meas:Reflevel:absolute:low
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW Description This command sets or queries the low reference level, and is the lower reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Note: This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements. Group Measurement Related Commands...
Page 594: Measurement:meas:Reflevel:absolute:mid[1]
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] Description This command sets or queries the mid reference level, and is the 50% reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Note: This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements.
Page 595 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 Description This command sets or queries the mid reference level for the ”to” wa- veform when taking a delay measurement, and is the 50% reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Page 596: Measurement:meas:Reflevel:method
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod Description This command specifies or queries the reference level units used for measurement calculations. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then choosing the de- sired reference level from the Units group box. Measurements are spe- cified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Page 597: Measurement:meas:Reflevel:percent:high
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH Description This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the high reference level when MEASUre- ment:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Note: This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.
Page 598: Measurement:meas:Reflevel:percent:low
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW Description This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the low reference level when MEASUre- ment:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Percentage Low Ref value.
Page 599: Measurement:meas:Reflevel:percent:mid
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] Description This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the mid reference level when MEASUre- ment:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Note: This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements.
Page 600 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 Description This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the mid reference level for the second wave- form specified when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Page 601: Measurement:meas:Reflevel
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel? Description This query- -only command returns the current reference level parame- ters. It returns them in the following order: ABSOLUTE and then PER- CENT for individual user measurements. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Group Measurement Syntax...
Page 602: Measurement:meas:Source[1]
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] Description This command sets or queries the source for all single channel measure- ments and specifies the source to measure ”from” when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to select- ing Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired measurement source.
Page 603 Example 2 MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE[1]? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE[1] MATH1 indicating that Math1 is the measurement 2 source. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 583 --...
Page 604: Measurement:meas:Source2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 Description This command sets or queries the source for all single channel measure- ments and specifies the reference source to measure ”to” when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, selecting a mea- surement type of either Phase or Delay, and then choosing the desired measurement source.
Page 605 Example 2 MEASUrement:MEAS2:SOURCE2? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2 MATH1 indicating that Math 1 is the measurement 2 source. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 585 --...
Page 606: Measurement:meas:Source:Sigtype (Tds5000B Series Option Sm)
MEASurement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>:SIGType (TDS5000B Series option SM) Description This command sets or queries the type of input signal used for the spe- cified measurement slot. MEAS<x> is 1 through 8 for the measurement slot using SOURCE<x>, 1 or 2. To ensure accurate measurements, use this command to specify the in- put- -signal type for the measurement source.
Page 607: Measurement:meas:State
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE Description This command sets or queries whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed. The measurement slot is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to select- ing Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and then clicking the Display button.
Page 608 Example 2 MEASUrement:MEAS1:STATE? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0 indicating that measurement defined for measurement slot 1 is disabled. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 588 --...
Page 609: Measurement:meas:Type
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Description This command sets or queries the measurement type defined for the specified measurement slot. The measurement slot is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to select- ing Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired measurement type.
Page 610 H CARea The cycle area measures the voltage over time. In other words, it mea- sures, in volt- -seconds, the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region. The area measured above the com- mon reference point is positive, while the area below the common reference point is negative.
Page 611 This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a refer- ence waveform saved in fast acquisition mode. Extinction Ratio = (High / Low), ratios greater than 100 or less than 1 generate errors; low must be greater than or equal to 1 microwatt. H EYEHeight This measures the vertical opening of an eye diagram in volts.
Page 612 H MEDian This (histogram measurement) measures the middle point of the histo- gram box. Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box are less than this value and half are greater than this value. H MINImum This amplitude measurement finds the minimum amplitude. This val- ue is typically the most negative peak voltage.
Page 613 H PDUty The positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period, expressed as a percentage. It is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. Positive Duty Cycle = (Positive Width)/Period * 100% H PEAKHits This (histogram measurement) measures the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram.
Page 614 H QFACtor This measures the quality factor. The Q factor is a figure of merit for an eye diagram, which indicates the vertical eye opening relative to the noise at the low and high logic levels. It is the ratio of the eye size to noise.
Page 615 H WAVEFORMS The waveform count (histogram measurement) measures the number of waveforms used to calculate the histogram. Example 1 MEASUrement:MEAS2:TYPe FREQuency This command defines measurement 2 as a measurement of the fre- quency of a waveform. Example 2 MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPe? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE RMS indicating that measurement 1 is defined to measure the RMS value of a waveform.
Page 616: Measurement:meas:Units
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? Description This query- -only command returns the units associated with the speci- fied measurement. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Group Measurement Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? Example MEASUrement:MEAS1:UNIts? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNIts % indicating units for measurement 1 are set to percent.
Page 617: Measurement:meas:Value
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? Description This query- -only command returns the value that has been calculated for the measurement specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Statistics from the Measure menu and then choosing Value from the drop- -down list to display all measurement values on- -screen.
Page 618: Measurement:meas
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? Description This query- -only command returns all measurement parameters for the displayed measurement specified by x, which can range from 1 through 8. This query command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and viewing the Measurements table; then choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button and viewing the Delay Edge and Search Direction settings.

Page 619: Measurement:method
MEASUrement:METHod Description This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the 0% and 100% reference level. This command is equivalent to selecting Refer- ence Levels from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired De- termine Base, Top From setting. Group Measurement Related Commands...
Page 620 Example 2 MEASUrement:METHod? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:METHOD MINMAX indicating that the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 600 --...
Page 621: Measurement:noise (Tds5000B Series Option Sm)
MEASUrement:NOISe (TDS5000B Series option SM) Description This command sets or queries whether the noise measurement is made on the high or low level of the waveform. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Ref Levs > Eye > Top Level or Base Level in the Comm tab of the Measurement Setup dialog box.
Page 622: Measurement:reflevel:absolute:high
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH Description This command sets or queries the high reference level, and is the upper reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Ab- solute. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Absolute High Ref value.
Page 623: Measurement:reflevel:absolute:low
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW Description This command sets or queries the low reference level, and is the lower reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Ab- solute. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Absolute Low Ref value.
Page 624: Measurement:reflevel:absolute:mid
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] Description This command sets or queries the mid reference level, and is the 50% reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Ab- solute. This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Absolute Mid Ref value.
Page 625: Measurement:reflevel:absolute:mid2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 Description This command sets or queries the mid reference level for the ”to” wa- veform when taking a delay measurement, and is the 50% reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This command affects the results of delay measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Absolute Mid2 Ref value.
Page 626: Measurement:reflevel:method
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod Description This command specifies or queries the reference level units used for measurement calculations. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then choosing the de- sired reference level from the Units group box. Note: this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
Page 627: Measurement:reflevel:percent:high
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH Description This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) that is used to calculate the high reference level when MEA- SUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Per- centage High Ref value.
Page 628: Measurement:reflevel:percent:low
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW Description This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) that is used to calculate the low reference level when MEA- SUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Per- centage Low Ref value.
Page 629: Measurement:reflevel:percent:mid
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] Description This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) that is used to calculate the mid reference level when MEA- SUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and, then entering the Percentage Mid Ref value.
Page 630: Measurement:reflevel:percent:mid2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 Description This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) that is used to calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects the results of delay measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Percentage Mid2 Ref value.
Page 631: Measurement:reflevel
MEASUrement:REFLevel? Description This query- -only command returns the current reference level parame- ters. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then viewing the current Reference Levels set- tings. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel? Example MEASUrement:REFLevel? This query might return these reference level settings :MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD ABSOLUTE;...
Page 632: Measurement:statistics:count
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt Description This command (no query form) clears existing measurement statistics from memory. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, selecting Statistics, and clicking the Reset button. Group Measurement Related Commands MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe Syntax MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt {RESET} Argument H RESET This clears existing measurement statistics from memory.
Page 633: Measurement:statistics:mode
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe Description This command controls the operation and display of management statis- tics. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, clicking the Statistics button and then choosing the desired Measurement Format. Group Measurement Related Commands MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting Syntax 1 MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe {OFF|ALL|VALUE-...
Page 634: Measurement:statistics:weighting
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting Description This command sets or queries the time constant for mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations. This command is equivalent to se- lecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, clicking the Statis- tics button and entering the desired Weight n= value. Group Measurement Related Commands...
Page 635: Measurement
MEASUrement? Description This query- -only command returns all measurement parameters in the following order: MEAS1, MEAS2, MEAS3, MEAS4, MEAS5, MEAS6, MEAS7, MEAS8, and IMMED. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement? Example MEASUrement? This query might return :MEASUREMENT:GATING OFF;IMMED:TYPE UNDE- FINED;UNITS ”V”;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEA- SUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEA- SUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DI-...
Page 636: Newpass
NEWpass Description This command (no query form) changes the password that enables ac- cess to password protected data. The PASSWord command must be successfully executed before using this command or an execution error will be generated. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands PASSWord, *PUD Syntax NEWpass <QString>...
Page 637: Password
PASSWord Description This command (no query form) enables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands. Sending PASSWord without any arguments disables these same commands. Once the password is successfully entered, the *PUD and NEWpass commands are enabled until the instrument is powered off, or until the FACtory command, the PASSWord command with no arguments, or the *RST command is issued.
Page 638: Recall:mask
RECAll:MASK Description This command (no query form) recalls a stored mask as the User mask. Group Mask Related Commands SAVe:MASK Syntax RECAll:MASK <Qstring> Arguments H <Qstring> Is a quoted string that defines the file name and path from where the mask will be recalled.
Page 639: Recall:setup
RECAll:SETUp Description This command (no query form) returns stored or factory settings to the instrument from a copy of the settings stored in memory. If factory is referenced (by specifying ’0’), the factory default values will be re- stored. This command is equivalent to *RCL and performs the same function as selecting Recall from the File menu, and then choosing the Setup button.
Page 640 Example 3 RECAll:SETUp ”TEK00000.SET” This command recalls the setup from the file TEK00000.SET in the default directory for setups (C:\TekScope\setups). TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 620 --...
Page 641: Recall:waveform
RECAll:WAVEform Description This command (no query form) recalls a stored waveform to a refer- ence location. This command is equivalent to selecting Recall from the File menu, and then pressing the Waveform button. Group Save and Recall Related Commands DELEte:WAVEform, SAVe_WAVEform Syntax RECAll:WAVEform {<file path>,REF<x>} Arguments...
Page 642: Ref:Label
REF<x>:LABel? Description This query- -only command returns a branch query containing the wave- form label name and the coordinates at which the label (attached to the displayed waveform of the specified reference) is displayed. The refer- ence waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 643: Ref:Label:name
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe Description This command sets or queries the label of the designated waveform. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- - channel instruments.
Page 644: Ref:Label:xpos
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS Description This command sets or queries the X screen offset at which the label (attached to the displayed waveform of the specified reference) is dis- played, relative to the left edge of the screen The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- - channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 645: Ref:Label:ypos
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS Description This command sets or queries the Y screen offset at which the label (attached to the displayed waveform of the specified reference) is dis- played, relative to the top edge of the screen. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- - channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 646: Ref:Horizontal:position
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition Description This command sets or queries the horizontal display position of the ref- erence waveform. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu, choosing Refer- ence Setup…...
Page 647: Ref:Vertical:position
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition Description This command sets or queries the vertical position of a reference wave- form The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 648 Example 2 REF1:VERTical:POSition? This query might return :REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION -1.3000E+00 indicating that the current position of Reference 1 is 1.3 divisions be- low the center horizontal graticule. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 628 --...
Page 649: Ref:Vertical:scale
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle Description This command sets or queries the vertical scale of a reference wave- form. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four- -channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments.
Page 650 Example 2 CH2:SCAle? This query might return :REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000e+00 indicating that the current vertical scale setting for Reference 2 is 1 V per division. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 630 --...
Page 651 Description This command (no query form) embeds a comment within GPIB pro- grams as a means of internally documenting the programs. The instru- ment ignores these embedded comment lines. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands NEWpass, *PUD Syntax REM <QString> Argument H <QString> This is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters.
Page 652: Rosc:source
ROSc:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries the source for the 10 MHz timebase ref- erence. Depending on the command argument that you specify, you can use an external reference or use the internal crystal oscillator as the timebase reference. This command is also useful for synchronizing multiple instruments.
Page 653: Rosc:state
ROSc:STATE? Description This query- -only command returns the state of the 10 MHz timebase reference. This command will return either LOCKED or UNLOCKED. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands ROSc:SOUrce Syntax ROSc:STATE? Example ROSc:STATE? This query might return :ROSC:STATE LOCKED indicating that the state of the 10 MHz timebase reference is locked. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 633 --...
Page 654: Save:mask
SAVe:MASK Description This command (no query form) saves the User mask to a mass storage file. Group Mask Related Commands RECAll:MASK Syntax SAVe:MASK <Qstring> Arguments H <Qstring> This is the location to where the mask is stored. <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path.
Page 655: Save:setup
SAVe:SETUp Description This command (no query form) stores the state of the instrument to a specified memory location. You can later use the *RCL command to restore the instrument to this saved state. This is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu, and then pressing the Setup button. Group Save and Recall Related Commands...
Page 656: Save:waveform
SAVe:WAVEform Description This command (no query form) saves a waveform to one of four refer- ence memory locations or a file. This command is equivalent to select- ing Reference Waveforms from the File menu and choosing Save Wfm from the drop- -down list. Group Save and Recall Related Commands...
Page 657: Save:waveform:fileformat
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat Description This command specifies or returns the file format for saved waveforms. Waveform header and timing information is included in the resulting file of non- -internal formats. The instrument saves DPO waveforms as a 500 x 200 matrix, with the first row corresponding to the most recently acquired data.
Page 658 H MATLab This specifies that waveforms are saved in Matlab format, using a .dat filename extension. When saving in this format, waveform values are delimited with new lines. MATLAB format enables easy import of waveform data into MathCad or MATLAB. For FastAcq waveforms, data is imported as a matrix.
Page 659: Select:
SELect:<wfm> Description This command turns on the display of a specified waveform and also resets the acquisition. The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform. Group Vertical Syntax 1 SELect:<wfm>...

Page 660: Select:control
SELect:CONTRol <wfm> Description This command sets or queries the waveform that is selected as the im- plied recipient of channel- -related commands that support legacy- -style programs. The command form also performs the equivalent of a SE- LECT:<wfm> ON command. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and either viewing or set- ting the Source waveform.

Page 661: Select
SELect? Description This query- -only command returns the selected waveform that is af- fected by the front- -panel controls and the display status (on or off) of all waveforms. This query command is equivalent to selecting Mea- surement Setup from the Measure menu and viewing the Source wave- form setting.
Page 662: Setup:name
SETUp:NAMe Description This command allows you to create (or query) a name for your saved setups. The default name for all user setups is ”User.” The default name for factory setups is ”Factory.” This command is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu, pressing the Setup button, selecting the desired setup location, clicking the Keyboard icon, and entering your setup name.
Page 663 SET? Description This query- -only command returns the commands that list the instru- ment settings, except for configuration information for the calibration values. You can use these commands to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the SET? query. This command is identi- cal to the *LRN? command.
Page 664: Teksecure
TEKSecure Description This command initializes both waveform and setup memories, over- writing any previously stored data. TEKSecure deletes all four waveform reference memory slots on the hard drive, if they exist, and puts all setups in the factory- -initialized state. External setups that are stored on the hard drive are not affected. Group Miscellaneous Syntax...
Page 665: Test
TEST Description This command (no query form) provides the ability to select and exe- cute an item at any level of the test hierarchy (Test, Area or Subsys- tem). This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu, choosing a test and then pressing Run. Note: Turning off both DIAg:CONTROL:HALT and DIAg:CON- TROL:LOOP before executing the TEST command is recommended.
Page 666: Test:results
TEST:RESults? Description This query- -only command returns an abbreviated status about the re- sults of the last TEST execution. This command is equivalent to select- ing Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status. Group Diagnostics Related Commands TEST, TEST:RESults:VERBose? Syntax...
Page 667: Test:results:verbose
TEST:RESults:VERBose? Description This query- -only command returns a more explanatory message about the results of the last TEST execution than the TEST:RESults query. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then clicking the Error Log button. Group Diagnostics Related Commands...
Page 668: Test:stop
TEST:STOP Description This command (no query form) causes test (or diagnostics) execution to terminate at the end of the next low- -level test. This command is equiv- alent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then clicking Abort. Group Diagnostics Related Commands...
Page 669: Time
TIME Description This command sets or queries the time that the instrument displays. This command is equivalent to selecting Set Time & Date from the Uti- lities menu and then setting the fields in the Time group box. Group Miscellaneous Related Commands DATE Syntax 1...
Page 670: Trigger
TRIGger Description This command forces a trigger event to occur. The query returns the current trigger parameters for the instrument. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger FORCe Syntax 2 TRIGger? Argument H FORCe This creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is set to READy, the acquisition will complete.
Page 671 LARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE INSIDE;WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E-9;LOGIC:IN- PUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4 HIGH;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:IN- PUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4 HIGH;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESH- OLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTA- TIME 2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESH- OLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN FASTERTHAN;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN;PO-...
Page 672: Trigger:a
TRIGger:A Description This command sets the A trigger level automatically to 50% of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal. The query returns current A trigger parameters. The trigger level is the voltage threshold through which the trigger source signal must pass to generate a trigger event.
Page 673 1.2000;SOURCE CH2;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SE- THOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.2000;SOURCE CH1;:TRIG- GER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-9;SETTIME 3.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;TRIGIF ACCEPT;PO- LARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE INSIDE;WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E-9;LOGIC:IN- PUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4 HIGH;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:IN- PUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4 HIGH;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESH- OLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIG- GER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH...
Page 674: Trigger:a:communication:ami...pulseform (Option Sm Only)
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI...PULSEForm (Option SM Only) Description This entry covers five separate commands, one each for AMI and AMI subtypes. The commands set or query the AMI pulse form to one of three possibilities. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS| B6ZS|B8ZS):PULSEForm {PLUSOne|MINUSOne| EYEDiagram} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:COMMunica- tion:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS):PULSEForm?
Page 675 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI...THReshold:HIGH (Option SM Only) Description This command sets or queries the threshold high level. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:COMMunica- tion:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS):THReshold:HIGH <NR3> Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS| B6ZS|B8ZS):THReshold:HIGH? Arguments H <NR3> The high threshold parameter expressed in volts. Example 1 TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.8E-2 This command sets the threshold high level to 2.8E- -2. Example 2 TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:HIGH? This query might return...
Page 676 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI...THReshold:LOW (Option SM Only) Description This command sets or queries the threshold low level. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:COMMunica- tion:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS):THReshold:LOW <NR3> Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS| B6ZS|B8ZS):THReshold:LOW? Arguments H <NR3> The high threshold parameter expressed in volts. Example 1 TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW 2.8E-2 This command sets the threshold low level to 2.8E- -2. Example 2 TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW? This query might return...
Page 677: Trigger:a:communication:bitrate (Option Sm Only)
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate (Option SM Only) Description This command sets or queries the bit rate. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate <NR3> Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate? Arguments H <NR3> A non- -negative number greater than one and expressed as bits per second. Example 1 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate 1.544e6 This command sets the bit rate to 1.544e6 bits per second.
Page 678: Trigger:a:communication:clock:polarity (Option Sm Only)
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:POLarity (Option SM Only) Description This command sets or queries the communication clock polarity Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:POLarity (RISe|FALL} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:POLarity? Arguments H RISe Specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal. H FALL Specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
Page 679: Trigger:a:communication:cmi:pulseform (Option Sm Only)
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm (Option SM Only) Description This command sets or queries the CMI pulse form. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm (PLUSOne|MINUSOne|ZERO|EYEDiagram} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm? Arguments H PLUSOne Triggers on a positive mark. H MINUSOne Triggers on a negative mark. H ZERO Triggers on the bit representing zero.
Page 680: Trigger:a:communication:code (Option Sm Only)
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe (Option SM Only) Description This command sets or queries the signal code that the communications trigger should expect on the incoming signal. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe {AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS|CMI|NRZ|MLT3|MANChes- ter} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe? Arguments H AMI H HDB3 H B3ZS H B6ZS H B8ZS H CMI...
Page 681: Trigger:a:communication:source (Option Sm Only)
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce (Option SM Only) Description This command sets or queries the source channel. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce? Arguments H CH1 This argument selects CH 1 as the source channel. H CH2 This argument selects CH 2 as the source channel. H CH3 This argument selects CH 3 as the source channel.
Page 682: Trigger:a:communication:source:type (Option Sm Only)
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce:TYPe (Option SM Only) Description This command sets or queries the source type. This command works only when the Eye Diagram pulseform is selected. TRIGger:MAIN:COMMunication:SOUrce:TYPe works in an identical fashion to this command and provides compatibility with previous Tek- tronix oscilloscopes. Group Trigger Syntax 1...
Page 683: Trigger:a:communication:standard (Option Sm Only)
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:STANdard (Option SM Only) Description This command sets or queries the standard that identifies the code and bit rate. The bit rate is used to compute the Unit Interval, which is the inverse of the bit rate. The Unit Interval influences time skew in an Eye Diagram, where you do post processing on AMI isolated pulses, and pulse width settings if CMI.
Page 684 Communication Trigger Standards Argu - - Code Mask Models ment Rate Type ATAG1 Serial Gb/s ATAG2 Serial Gb/s ATAG3 Serial Gb/s CLOCK None 2.048 ITU -- T Coax Mb/s G.703 None CLOCKSy 2.048 ITU -- T mmetrical Mb?s G.703 Vi deo Mb/s 143.18 Video...
Page 685 2.048 ITU -- T HDB3 Mb/s G.703 8.448 ITU -- T HDB3 Mb/s G.703 34.368 ITU -- T HDB3 Mb/s G.703 139.26 ITU -- T G.703 ENET100 MLT3 Ethernet Mb/s ENET1250 1.25 Ethernet Gb/s ENETXAU Ethernet 3.125 Gb/s FC133 132.8 Fibre Mb/s Channel...
Page 686 RATE32 32.06 ITU-- T Mbit Mb/s G.703 (10/98) RATE97 97.73 ITU-- T Mbit Mb/s G.703 (10/98) STM1E 155.52 ITU-- T Mb/s G.703 (10/98) STS1 51.84 ANSI B3ZS Mb/s T1.102 STS3 155.52 ANSI T1. Mb/s VIDEO Video Mb/s VIDEO Video TDS5104B Mb/s Custom 1.544...
Page 687 Example 1 TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE:STANDARD E4 This command sets the standard to E4. Example 2 TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE:STANDARD? This query might return TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE:STANDARD DS1 TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 667 --...
Page 688: Trigger:a:edge:coupling
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling Description This command sets or queries the type of coupling for the A edge trig- ger. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Edge Trigger, and choosing from the Coupling drop- -down list. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 689 Example 2 TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING DC indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 669 --...
Page 690: Trigger:a:edge:slope
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe Description This command sets or queries the slope for the A edge trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Slope. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL} Syntax 2...
Page 691: Trigger:a:edge:source
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries the source for the A edge trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing from the Source drop- -down list. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling Syntax 1...
Page 692: Trigger:a:edge
TRIGger:A:EDGE? Description This query- -only command returns the trigger source, coupling, and slope for the A edge trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Edge Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the current setups. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse, TRIGger:A:LOGIc Syntax TRIGger:A:EDGE? Example...
Page 693: Trigger:a:holdoff:actual
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal? Description This query- -only command returns the holdoff time actually used (ex- pressed in seconds) by the A trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then viewing the current Trig Holdoff value. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?, TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY,...
Page 694: Trigger:a:holdoff:by
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY Description This command sets or queries the type of holdoff for the A trigger. Holdoff types are expressed as either user- -specified time (TIMe) or by an internally calculated minimum time value (DEFAult/AUTO). This command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then setting the Holdoff type.
Page 695: Trigger:a:holdoff:time
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe Description This command sets or queries the A trigger holdoff time. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Trig Holdoff. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe <NR3> Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe? Argument...
Page 696: Trigger:a:holdoff
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff? Description This query- -only command returns the A trigger holdoff parameters. These parameters specify the time period during which the trigger cir- cuitry is not looking to generate a trigger event. This command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings.
Page 697: Trigger:a:level
TRIGger:A:LEVel Description This command sets or queries the level for the A trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then viewing or setting the trigger Level. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:LEVel {ECL|TTL|<NR3>} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:LEVel? Arguments H ECL...
Page 698: Trigger:a:logic:class
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss Description This command sets or queries the class of the Logic Trigger. Used in conjunction with the TRIGger:A:TYPe command, this command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern, Logic State or Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:TYPe, TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss {PATtern|STATE|SETHold}...
Page 699 Example 2 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss PATTERN This command sets the trigger A logic class to PATtern, which causes the instrument to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 679 --...
Page 700: Trigger:a:logic:function
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion Description This command sets or queries the logical combination of the input channels for the A pattern and A state logic triggers. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern or State for the Trigger Type, and setting or viewing the Pattern Type.
Page 701: Trigger:a:logic:input:ch
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> Description This command sets or queries the A logical input for the logic trigger channel specified by x. The value of x ranges from 1 through 3 for four- -channel instruments. For two- -channel instruments x can only be 1.

Page 702 Example 2 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH2 HIGH This command sets the A logic trigger input to logic HIGH for chan- nel 2. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 682 --...
Page 703: Trigger:a:logic:input
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut? Description On four- -channel instruments, this query- -only command returns the A logic trigger input expected for channel 1, 2, and 3. Channel 4 is set or queried with the command TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4. On two- -channel instruments, this query returns the A logic trigger in- put expected for channel 1.
Page 704: Trigger:a:logic:pattern:input:ch2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2 Description This command sets or queries the A logic trigger input for channel 2 in two- -channel instruments only. The command specifies the logic value used when the pattern trigger detects the threshold level. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired logical input from the Ch2 drop- -down list, which is located in the Input Threshold group box.
Page 705: Trigger:a:logic:pattern:input:ch4
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 Description This command sets or queries the A logic trigger input for channel 4 in four- -channel instruments only. The command specifies the logic value used when the pattern trigger detects the threshold level. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired logical input from the Ch4 drop- -down list, which is located in the Input Threshold group box.
Page 706: Trigger:a:logic:pattern:when
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn Description This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A logic pattern trigger with respect to the defined input pattern. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern for Trigger Type, and choosing a trigger condi- tion from the Pattern drop- -down list, which is located in the Trigger When group box.
Page 707 Example 1 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE indicating that the A logic pattern will trigger when the pattern becomes true. Example 2 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn FALSe This command specifies to trigger the A logic pattern when the pattern becomes false. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 687 --...
Page 708: Trigger:a:logic:pattern:when:lesslimit
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit Description This command sets or queries the maximum time that the selected pat- tern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern as the Trigger Type, selecting Less Than for the Pattern in the Trigger When settings, and entering a maximum value for Time.
Page 709: Trigger:a:logic:pattern:when:morelimit
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit Description This command sets or queries the minimum time that the selected pat- tern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern as the Trigger Type, selecting More Than for the Pattern in the Trigger When settings, and entering a minimum value for Time.
Page 710: Trigger:a:logic:pattern
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern? Description This query- -only command returns the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern trigger, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the maximum and minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then viewing the current setups.
Page 711: Trigger:a:logic:sethold:clock:edge
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE Description This command sets or queries the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering. This is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Clock Edge. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SE- THold:CLOCk:THReshold Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}...
Page 712: Trigger:a:logic:sethold:clock:source
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries the clock source for the A logic trigger setup and hold input. This is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired channel from the Clock Source drop- -down list. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 713: Trigger:a:logic:sethold:clock:threshold
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold Description This command sets or queries the clock voltage threshold for the setup and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and setting the desired Clock Level. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SE- THold:CLOCk:SOUrce Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold...
Page 714: Trigger:a:logic:sethold:clock
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk? Description This query- -only command returns the clock edge polarity, voltage threshold and source input for setup and hold triggering. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current clock setups. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 715: Trigger:a:logic:sethold:data:source
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries the data source for the setup and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired channel from the Data Source drop- -down list. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 716: Trigger:a:logic:sethold:data:threshold
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold Description This command sets or queries the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Data Level. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold {ECL|TTL<NR3>}...
Page 717: Trigger:a:logic:sethold:data
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa? Description This query- -only command returns the voltage threshold and data source for the setup and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current data setups. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk? Syntax...
Page 718: Trigger:a:logic:sethold:holdtime
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime Description This command sets or queries the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Hold Time. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>...
Page 719: Trigger:a:logic:sethold:settime
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime Description This command sets or queries the setup time for setup and hold viola- tion triggering. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Setup Time. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>...
Page 720: Trigger:a:logic:sethold
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold? Description This query- -only command returns the clock edge polarity, voltage threshold and source input; data voltage threshold and source; and both setup and hold times for setup and hold violation triggering. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current setups.
Page 721: Trigger:a:logic:state:input:ch2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2 Description This command sets or queries the slope for channel 2 when the logic class is set to STATE in two- -channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic State from the Trig menu and then choos- ing the desired channel input (NEG or POS) from the Ch2 drop- -down list.
Page 722: Trigger:a:logic:state:input:ch4
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4 Description This command sets or queries the slope for channel 4 when the logic class is set to State in four- -channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic State from the Trig menu and then choos- ing the desired channel input (NEG or POS) from the Ch4 (Clk) drop- - down list.
Page 723: Trigger:a:logic:state:when
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn Description This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A logic state trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic State from the Trig menu and choosing the desired condition from the Trigger When Pattern drop- -down list. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 724: Trigger:a:logic:state
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE? Description This query- -only command returns the data input and trigger criteria for the A logic trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic State from the Trig menu and then viewing the current logic state settings. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn...
Page 725: Trigger:a:logic:threshold:ch
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> Description This command sets or queries the A logic trigger threshold voltage for the channel, specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four- - channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two- -channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, choosing a logic trigger type, such as State or Pattern, and setting the Input Threshold voltage for the desired channel.

Page 726: Trigger:a:logic:threshold
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold? Description This query- -only command returns the threshold voltage for all channels in an A logic trigger. This command query is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, choosing a logic trig- ger type, such as State or Pattern, and viewing the current Input Thresh- old voltage settings.
Page 727: Trigger:a:logic
TRIGger:A:LOGIc? Description This query- -only command returns all of the A logic trigger parameters. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGIc? Example TRIGger:A:LOGIc? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN; FUNCTION AND;WHEN TRUE; THRESHOLD:CH1 1.4000;CH2 1.4000;CH3 1.4000; CH4 1.4000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH; CH2 X;CH3 X; :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X;...
Page 728: Trigger:a:mode
TRIGger:A:MODe Description This command sets or queries the A trigger mode. This command is equivalent to selecting Mode from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Trigger Mode. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:LEVel Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:MODe {AUTO|NORMal} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:MODe? Arguments H AUTO...
Page 729: Trigger:a:pulse:class
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss Description This command sets or queries the type of pulse on which to trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting the setup menu for the pulse type that you want from the Trig menu: Glitch Setup, Width Setup, Runt Setup, Timeout Setup, or Transition Setup. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 730 H WINdow This triggers when a pulse is found that meets the conditions set by the A Event window trigger type, specified by the following com- mands: TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDth Example 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH indicating that a pulse was found that is of the specified polarity and width.
Page 731: Trigger:a:pulse:glitch:polarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity Description This command sets or queries the polarity for A pulse glitch trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Polarity. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:LEVel, TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity {POSITIVe|NEG- ative|EITher} Syntax 2...
Page 732: Trigger:a:pulse:glitch:trigif
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF Description This command sets or queries the acceptance/rejection of the glitch pulse trigger, based on width. This command is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired Trig if Width setting. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF {ACCept|REJect}...
Page 733: Trigger:a:pulse:glitch:width
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth Description This command sets or queries the width for the A glitch trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Width. For information about using the width value, refer to the TRIG- ger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF command.
Page 734: Trigger:a:pulse:glitch
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch? Description This query- -only command returns the current A glitch pulse trigger parameters. This command query is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the current glitch trigger settings. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity, TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF, TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth Syntax TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?
Page 735: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:logic:input:ch
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT:CH<x> Description This command sets or queries the A runt logic input for the channel specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to set- ting the runt logic inputs from the Trigger When section in the Runt Trigger menu.

Page 736: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:logic:input
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT? Description This query- -only command returns the current A runt pulse trigger logic input parameters. This query is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings. Note: This command is not available in two- -channel instruments. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 737: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:logic:threshold:ch
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> Description This command sets or queries the A runt logic threshold for the channel specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to select- ing Runt Setup from the Trig menu and setting the runt logic threshold. While all channels can be set or queried, only channels 3 and 4 can be used if the runt source is channel 1 or 2.

Page 738: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:logic
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc? Description This query- -only command returns the current A runt trigger logic pa- rameters. This query is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings. Note: This command is not available in two- -channel instruments. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 739: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:polarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity Description This command sets or queries the polarity for the A pulse runt trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the Polarity setting. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold? Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity {POSITIVe|NEG- Ative} Syntax 2...
Page 740: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:threshold:both
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh Description This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower switching thresholds for the A pulse runt trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the Upper Level and Lower Level voltages. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 741: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:threshold:high
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH Description This command sets or queries the upper limit for the A pulse runt trig- ger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and setting the runt trigger Upper Level voltage. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold? Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>...
Page 742: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:threshold:low
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW Description This command sets or queries the lower limit for the A pulse runt trig- ger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the Lower Level voltage. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold? Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW <NR3>...
Page 743: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold? Description This query- -only command returns the upper and lower thresholds for the A pulse runt trigger. This command query is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the Upper Level and Lower Level settings. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 744: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:when
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn Description This command sets or queries the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it detects a runt. This is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired Trigger When setting from the drop- -down list. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 745 Example 2 TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn WIDERthan This command sets the runt trigger to occur when the instrument de- tects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 725 --...
Page 746: Trigger:a:pulse:runt:width
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth Description This command sets or queries the minimum width for an A Pulse Runt trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the Width. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>...
Page 747: Trigger:a:pulse:runt
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT? Description This query- -only command returns the current A runt trigger parame- ters. This command query is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?, TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?, TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?, TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth? Syntax TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT? Example...
Page 748: Trigger:a:pulse:source
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries the source for the A pulse trigger. This source parameter applies to all classes of pulse triggers. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the pulse type (Glitch, Width, Runt, Timeout, or Tran- sition), and then choosing the desired channel from the Source pull- - down list.
Page 749: Trigger:a:pulse:timeout:polarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity Description This command sets or queries the polarity for the A pulse timeout trig- ger. This command is equivalent to selecting Timeout Setup from the Trig menu and setting the desired polarity in the Trigger When box. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut? Syntax 1...
Page 750: Trigger:a:pulse:timeout:time
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe Description This command sets or queries the pulse timeout trigger time (measured in seconds). This command is equivalent to selecting Timeout Setup from the Trig menu and setting a value for Timer. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut? Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3>...
Page 751: Trigger:a:pulse:timeout
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut? Description This query- -only command returns the polarity and time- -out duration for the A pulse timeout trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Timeout Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the polarity in the Trig- ger When box and the Timer setting. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 752: Trigger:a:pulse:transition:deltatime
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime Description This command sets or queries the delta time used in calculating the transition value for the transition trigger. This is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and setting the Time. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity, TRIGger:A:PULse:TRAN- sition:THReshold? Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime <NR3>...
Page 753: Trigger:a:pulse:transition:polarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity Description This command sets or queries the polarity for the transition trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and choosing from the Polarity pull- -down list. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity {POS- ITIVe|NEGative|EITher} Syntax 2...
Page 754: Trigger:a:pulse:transition:threshold:both
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:BOTh Description This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower thresholds for the transition trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Transi- tion Setup from the Trig menu and setting the desired Upper Level and Lower Level voltages. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 755: Trigger:a:pulse:transition:threshold:high
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH Description This command sets or queries the upper (most positive) transition trig- ger threshold. This command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Upper Level voltage. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>...
Page 756: Trigger:a:pulse:transition:threshold:low
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW Description This command sets or queries the lower (most negative) transition trig- ger threshold. This command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and setting the desired Lower Level voltage. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW <NR3>...
Page 757: Trigger:a:pulse:transition:threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold? Description This query- -only command returns the upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the Upper Level and Lower Level voltage settings. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 758: Trigger:a:pulse:transition:when
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn Description This command sets or queries whether to check for a transitioning sig- nal that is faster or slower than the specified delta time. This is equiva- lent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the Trigger When Transition Time setting.
Page 759: Trigger:a:pulse:transition
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition? Description This query- -only command returns delta time, polarity, and both upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current transition settings. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 760: Trigger:a:pulse:width:highlimit
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit Description This command sets or queries the upper limit for the width trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the Trig menu and setting the Upper Limit. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth? Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit <NR3> Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit? Argument...
Page 761: Trigger:a:pulse:width:lowlimit
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit Description This command sets or queries the lower limit for the width trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the Trig menu and setting the pulse Lower Limit. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth? Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit <NR3> Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit? Argument...
Page 762: Trigger:a:pulse:width:polarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity Description This command sets or queries the polarity for the width trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the Trig menu and selecting the Polarity. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth? Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity {NEGAtive|POS- ITIVe} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity? Arguments H NEGAtive...
Page 763: Trigger:a:pulse:width:when
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn Description This command sets or queries whether to trigger on a pulse width that falls outside (or within) the specified range of limits. You can define or query trigger pulse width upper and lower limits using the TRIG- ger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOW- Limit commands.
Page 764 Example 2 TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn WIThin This command specifies that the duration of the A pulse will fall within defined high and low limits. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 744 --...
Page 765: Trigger:a:pulse:width
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth? Description This query- -only command returns the width parameters for the A pulse width trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current pulse width trigger Lower Limit, Upper Limit, Trig When and Polarity settings. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 766: Trigger:a:pulse:window:logic:input:ch
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT:CH<x> Description This command sets or queries the A window logic input for the channel specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to select- ing Window Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Logic in the Trigger When box, and selecting a logic (H, L, or X) for the channel.

Page 767: Trigger:a:pulse:window:logic:input
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT? Description This query- -only command returns the current window trigger logic input parameters. Note: This command is not available in two- -channel instruments. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIcINPUT? Example TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH; CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 747 --...
Page 768: Trigger:a:pulse:window:logic:threshold:ch
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> Description This command sets or queries the window logic trigger threshold for the channel specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equiva- lent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and setting the win- dow logic threshold in the Trigger When box.

Page 769: Trigger:a:pulse:window:logic
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc? Description This query- -only command returns the current window trigger logic parameters. Note: This command is not available in two- -channel instruments. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc? Example TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH; CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIN- DOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000.
Page 770: Trigger:a:pulse:window:threshold:both
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh Description This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower switching thresholds for the window trigger. This command is equivalent to se- lecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the Upper Level and Lower Level voltages. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 771: Trigger:a:pulse:window:threshold:high
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH Description This command sets or queries the upper limit for the pulse window trig- ger. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and setting the window trigger Upper Level voltage. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>...
Page 772: Trigger:a:pulse:window:threshold:low
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW Description This command sets or queries the lower limit for the window trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and setting the Lower Level voltage. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW <NR3> Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW? Argument H <NR3>...
Page 773: Trigger:a:pulse:window:threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold? Description This query- -only command returns the upper and lower thresholds for the window trigger. This command query is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the window trigger Upper Level and Lower Level settings. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 774: Trigger:a:pulse:window:type
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe Description This command sets or queries the window trigger type. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and select- ing Outside Limits or Inside Limits in the Trigger When section. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe {INSide|OUTside} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe?
Page 775: Trigger:a:pulse:window:when
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn Description This command sets or queries the window trigger violation qualifica- tion. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and selecting Logic, Occurs, or Wider than in the Trigger When box. Group Trigger Related Commands Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULseWINdow:WHEn {LOGIc|OCCurs|WID- ERthan}...
Page 776: Trigger:a:pulse:window:width
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDTH Description This command sets or queries the minimum width for a window viola- tion. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Wider than in the Trigger When box, and setting the Width. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDTH <NR3>...
Page 777: Trigger:a:pulse:window
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow? Description This query- -only command returns the current window trigger parame- ters. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow? Example TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE INSIDE; WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000e-9; LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW; :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000; :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3.
Page 778: Trigger:a:pulse
TRIGger:A:PULse? Description This query- -only command returns the A pulse trigger parameters. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc? Syntax TRIGger:A:PULse? Example TRIGger:A:PULse? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1; GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9; TRIGIF ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE; :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE; THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3; :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS; WIDTH 2.0000E-9;...
Page 779: Trigger:a:type
TRIGger:A:TYPe Description This command sets or queries the type of A trigger. The five types of triggers are of Edge, Logic, Pulse, Video, and Communication (Option SM). Logic and Pulse triggers contain classes. Logic triggers consist of State and Pattern classes; Pulse triggers consist of Glitch, Runt, Width, Transition, and Timeout classes.
Page 780 Example 1 TRIGger:A:TYPe EDGE This command sets the A trigger type to EDGE. Example 2 TRIGger:A:TYPe? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:TYPE PULSE indicating that the A trigger type is a pulse trigger. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 760 --...
Page 781: Trigger:a:video:custom:format
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat Description This command sets or queries the video trigger format. Use this com- mand only when the video format is set to custom. Group Trigger Related Commands Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat {INTERLAced|PRO- Gressive} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat? Arguments H INTERLAced This argument sets the format for interlaced video lines. H PROGressive This argument sets the format for progressive video lines.
Page 782: Trigger:a:video:custom:scan
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN Description This command sets or queries the horizontal line scan rate of the A vid- eo trigger. Use this command only when the video format is set to cus- tom. This is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu, setting Custom for Format, and selecting the Scan Rate from the drop- - down menu.
Page 783 Example 2 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN RATE1 This command sets the scan rate of the A trigger custom video to Rate 1, which is 15 kHz to 20 kHz (standard broadcast rate). TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 763 --...
Page 784: Trigger:a:video:custom
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom? This query only command returns the custom video parameters for the A trigger. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom? Example 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom? This query might return the parameters :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED; SCAN RATE1. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 764 --...
Page 785: Trigger:a:video:field
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD Description This command sets or queries the video field or line that the trigger detects. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD {ODD|EVEN|FIELD1|FIELD2|ALLFields|ALLLines|NU- MERic} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD? Arguments H ODD This argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video odd fields.
Page 786 Example 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD ALLFIELDS indicating that the A video will trigger on all video fields. Example 2 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD EVEN This command sets the A video trigger so that it will trigger on even fields. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 766 --...
Page 787: Trigger:a:video:holdoff:field
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD Description This command sets or queries the video trigger holdoff in terms of vid- eo fields. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD <NR3> Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD? Argument H <NR3> This argument is a real number from 0.0 to 8.5 in increments of 0.5. The argument sets the number of fields that the instrument waits be- fore re- -arming the video trigger.
Page 788: Trigger:a:video:line
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE Description This command sets or queries the video line number on which the in- strument triggers. This command is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Line # in the Trigger on box, and setting the line number. Use the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD command to actu- ally trigger the instrument on the line that you specify with this com- mand.
Page 789 Example 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE? This query might return :TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE 10 indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on line 10. Example 2 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE 23 This command sets the instrument to trigger on the line 23. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 769 --...
Page 790: Trigger:a:video:polarity
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity Description This command sets or queries the polarity of the A video trigger. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity {INVERTed|NORMAl} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity? Argument H INVERTed This argument sets the instrument to trigger on a positive video sync pulse. H NORMAl This argument sets the instrument to trigger on a negative video sync pulse.
Page 791: Trigger:a:video:scan
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN Description This command sets or queries the video trigger horizontal line scan rate. This command is for compatibility with earlier instruments in the TDS series. This command is the same as the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUS- Tom:SCAN command. Group Trigger Related Commands Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN {RATE1|RATE2|RATE3|RATE4|RATE5}...
Page 792 Example 2 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN RATE1 This command sets the scan rate of the A video trigger to Rate 1, which is 15 kHz to 20 kHz (standard broadcast rate). TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 772 --...
Page 793: Trigger:a:video:source
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries the source for the A video trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu and selecting a channel from the Source drop- -down menu. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce {CH<x>} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce?
Page 794: Trigger:a:video:standard
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard Description This command sets or queries the video standard. Group Trigger Syntax 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard {CUStom|NTSc|PAL| SCAM|HD480P60|HD720P60|HD1080I50|HD1080I60| HD1080P24|HD1080P25|HD1080SF24} Syntax 2 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce? Arguments H CUStom This argument sets the instrument to use custom video horizontal scan rate parameters that you set with the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN com- mand.
Page 795 This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/60 inter- laced format. H HD1080P24 This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/24 pro- gressive format. H HD1080P25 This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/25 pro- gressive format.
Page 796: Trigger:a:video
TRIGger:A:VIDeo? This query only command returns the video parameters for the A trig- ger. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:VIDeo? Example 1 TRIGger:A:VIDeo? This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED; SCAN RATE1; :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD ALLFIELDS; HOLDOFF:FIELD 1.0000;TIME 20.0000E-3; :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 1;SCAN RATE1; SOURCE CH1;STANDARD NTSC. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 776 --...
Page 797: Trigger:b
TRIGger:B Description This command sets the B trigger level to 50% of minimum and maxi- mum. The query form of this command returns the B trigger parame- ters. This command is similar to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current setups. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 798: Trigger:b:by
TRIGger:B:BY Description This command selects or returns whether the B trigger occurs after a specified number of events or a specified period of time after the A trigger. This is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B Seq tab, and then choosing Trig After Time or Trig on nth event.
Page 799 Example 2 TRIGger:B:BY TIMe This command sets the B trigger to occur at a set time after the A trig- ger event. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 779 --...
Page 800: Trigger:b:edge:coupling
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling Description This command sets or queries the type of coupling for the B trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the setting from the Coupling drop- -down list. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 801: Trigger:b:edge:slope
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe Description This command sets or queries the slope for the B trigger. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the Slope. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:B:EDGE? Syntax 1 TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL} Syntax 2 TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe?
Page 802: Trigger:b:edge:source
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce Description This command sets or queries the source for the B trigger. This com- mand is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired setting from the Source drop- - down list. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 803: Trigger:b:edge
TRIGger:B:EDGE? Description This query- -only command returns the source, slope, and coupling for B trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the current Source, Slope, and Coupling settings. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling, TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe,...
Page 804: Trigger:b:events:count
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt Description This command sets or queries the number of events that must occur before the B trigger (when TRIG:DELay:BY is set to EVENTS). This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B Seq tab, choosing Trig on nth event, and setting the desired Trig Event value.
Page 805: Trigger:b:events
TRIGger:B:EVENTS? Description This query- -only command returns the current B trigger events parame- ter. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B Seq tab, choosing Trig on nth event, and viewing the Trig Event setting. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 806: Trigger:b:level
TRIGger:B:LEVel Description This command sets or queries the level for the B trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B Seq tab and setting the B Trig Level voltage. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 807: Trigger:b:state
TRIGger:B:STATE Description This command sets or queries the state of B trigger activity. If the B trigger state is on, the B trigger is part of the triggering sequence. If the B trigger state is off, then only the A trigger causes the trigger event. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 808: Trigger:b:time
TRIGger:B:TIMe Description This command sets or queries B trigger delay time. The B Trigger time applies only if TRIGger:B:BY is set to TIMe. This command is equiva- lent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, choosing the A→B Seq tab, and setting Trig Delay. Group Trigger Related Commands...
Page 809: Trigger:b:type
TRIGger:B:TYPe Description This command sets or queries the type of B trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing Edge. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:TYPe Syntax 1 TRIGger:B:TYPe EDGE Syntax 2 TRIGger:B:TYPe? Argument H EDGE...
Page 810: Trigger:state
TRIGger:STATE? Description This query- -only command returns the current state of the triggering system. This command is equivalent to viewing the trigger status LEDs on the instrument front panel. Group Trigger Related Commands TRIGger:A:MODe Syntax TRIGger:STATE? Outputs H ARMed This indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information. All triggers are ignored when TRIGger:STATE is arming.
Page 811 Example TRIGger:STATE? This query might return :TRIGGER:STATE ARMED indicating that the pretrigger data is being acquired. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 791 --...
Page 812: Unlock
UNLock Description This command (no query form) unlocks the front panel. The command is equivalent to LOCk NONe. Note: If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the UNLock command has no effect. For more information, see the ANSI- -IEEE Std 488.1- -1987 Standard Digital Interface for Program- mable Instrumentation, section 2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.
Page 813: Verbose
VERBose Description This command sets or queries the Verbose state that controls the length of keywords on query responses. Keywords can be both headers and arguments. Note: This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2- -1987 Common Commands (those starting with an asterisk). However, this command does make a corresponding change in the Response Header Enable State of the opposite interface (physical or virtual GPIB interface).
Page 814: Wfminpre
WFMInpre? Description This query- -only command returns the waveform formatting specifica- tion to be applied to the next incoming CURVe command data. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands WFMOutpre? Syntax WFMInpre? Example WFMInpre? This query might return the waveform formatting as :WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1;...
Page 815: Wfminpre:bit_Nr
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr Description This command sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the waveform, as specified by the DATa:DESTination com- mand. This specification is only meaningful when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:ENCdg, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr Syntax 1...
Page 816: Wfminpre:bn_Fmt
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt Description This command sets or queries the format of binary data for incoming waveforms. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt Syntax 1 WFMInpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP|FP} Syntax 2 WFMInput:BN_Fmt? Arguments H RI This specifies signed integer data point representation. H RP This specifies positive integer data point representation.
Page 817: Wfminpre:byt_Nr
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr Description This command sets or returns the binary field data width for the first ordered waveform, as specified by the DATa:DESTination command. This specification is only meaningful when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre:BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands...
Page 818: Wfminpre:byt_Or
WFMInpre:BYT_Or Description This command sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first for incoming waveform data when data points require more than one byte. This specification only has meaning when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is greater than 1.
Page 819: Wfminpre:encdg
WFMInpre:ENCdg Description This command sets or queries the type of encoding for incoming wave- form data. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands WFMOutpre:ENCdg Syntax 1 WFMInpre:ENCdg {ASC|BIN} Syntax 2 WFMInpre:ENCdg? Arguments H ASC This specifies that the incoming data is in ASCII format. H BIN This specifies that the incoming data is in a binary format whose fur- ther interpretation requires knowledge of BYT_NR, BIT_NR,...
Page 820: Wfminpre:nr_Fr
WFMInpre:NR_FR? Description This query- -only command returns one frame, indicating the number of frames in the transmitted waveform record. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? Syntax WFMInpre:NR_FR? Example WFMInpre:NR_FR? This query will return :WFMINPRE:NR_FR 1 indicating that there is 1 data frame in the transmitted waveform record.
Page 821: Wfminpre:nr_Pt
WFMInpre:NR_Pt Description This command sets or returns the number of data points that are in the transmitted waveform record. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?, Syntax 1 WFMInpre:NR_Pt <NR1> Syntax 2 WFMInpre:NR_Pt? Argument H <NR1>...
Page 822: Wfminpre:pt_Fmt
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt Description This command sets or queries the point format of the incoming wave- form data. Regardless of the argument used, the scale, offset, and so on are interpreted similarly. When ENV is used, waveform data is inter- preted over the min- -max pair; when Y is used, it is interpreted over a single point.
Page 823 Example 2 WFMInpre:PT_Fmt? This query might return :WFMINPRE:PT_FMT ENV indicating that the waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum point pairs. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 803 --...
Page 824: Wfminpre:pt_Off
WFMInpre:PT_Off Description This command specifies or returns the trigger point within the wave- form record for the reference waveform specified by the DATa:DES- Tination command. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:DESTination, DATa:STARt, WFMOutpre:PT_Off Syntax 1 WFMInpre:PT_Off <NR1> Syntax 2 WFMInpre:PT_Off? Argument H <NR1>...
Page 825: Wfminpre:wfid
WFMInpre:WFId Description This command (no query form) accepts but ignores the argument. This command is provided only to allow a waveform extracted from the in- strument to be easily imported. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BN_Fmt, WFMInpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:WFid Syntax WFMInpre:WFId <String>...
Page 826: Wfminpre:xincr
WFMInpre:XINcr Description This command sets or queries the horizontal interval between incoming waveform points in units specified by WFMInpre:XUNit. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands WFMInpre:XUNit, WFMOutpre:XINcr Syntax 1 WFMInpre:XINcr <NR3> Syntax 2 WFMInpre:XINcr? Argument H <NR3> This is the horizontal interval representation. Example 1 WFMInpre:XINcr? This query might return...
Page 827: Wfminpre:xunit
WFMInpre:XUNit Description This command sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming wa- veform. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands WFMOutpre:XUNit Syntax 1 WFMInpre:XUNit <String> Syntax 2 WFMInpre:XUNit? Argument H <String> This contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the horizontal unit of measure for the incoming waveform.
Page 828: Wfminpre:xzero
WFMInpre:XZEro Description This command sets or queries the sub- -sample time between the trigger sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trig- ger on the incoming waveform. This value is used to compute TTOFF for the incoming waveform, and is expressed in terms of WFMInpre:XUNit.
Page 829: Wfminpre:ymult
WFMInpre:YMUlt Description This command sets or queries the vertical scale factor (in units/digitiz- ing level) for the reference waveform, specified by DATa:DESTination, upon a CURVe command. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:YUNit Syntax 1 WFMInpre:YMUlt <NR3> Syntax 2 WFMInpre:UMUlt? Argument H <NR3>...
Page 830: Wfminpre:yoff
WFMInpre:YOFf Description This command sets or queries the vertical position of the incoming wa- veform in digitizing levels. Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical position of the waveform. For those formats in which WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is important (all nonfloating point formats), this command must take the location of the binary point implied by BYT_NR into consideration.
Page 831: Wfminpre:yunit
WFMInpre:YUNit Description This command sets or queries the vertical units of the incoming wave- form. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands WFMOutpre:YUNit Syntax 1 WFMInpre:YUNit <String> Syntax 2 WFMInpre:YUNit? Argument H <String> This contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the vertical unit of measure for the incoming waveform.
Page 832: Wfminpre:yzero
WFMInpre:YZEro Description This command sets or queries the offset of the incoming waveform in units specified by WFMInpre:YUNit. Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical offset of the waveform. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands WFMInpre:YUNit, WFMOutpre:YZEro Syntax 1 WFMInpre:YZEro <NR3>...
Page 833: Wfmoutpre
WFMOutpre? Description This query- -only command returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The preamble components are considered to be of two types; formatting and inter- pretation. The formatting components are: ENCdg, BN_Fmt, BYT_Or, BYT_Nr, BIT_Nr.
Page 834: Wfmoutpre:bit_Nr
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr Description This command sets and returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain, as specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Note that values will be constrained according to the under- lying waveform data. This specification is only meaningful when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP.
Page 835: Wfmoutpre:bn_Fmt
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt Description This command sets or queries the format of binary data for outgoing waveforms specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:SOUrce Syntax 1 WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP|FP} Syntax 2 WFMOutput:BN_Fmt? Arguments H RI This specifies signed integer data point representation. H RP This specifies positive integer data point representation.
Page 836: Wfmoutpre:byt_Nr
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr Description This command sets or returns the binary field data width for the wave- form specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Note that values will be constrained according to the underlying waveform data. This specifica- tion is only meaningful when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN, and WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP.
Page 837: Wfmoutpre:byt_Or
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or Description This command sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first, during a waveform data transfer, when data points require more than one byte. This specification only has meaning when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands...
Page 838: Wfmoutpre:encdg
WFMOutpre:ENCdg Description This command sets and queries the type of encoding for outgoing wa- veforms. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BYT_Or, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt Syntax 1 WFMOutpre:ENCdg {ASC|BIN} Syntax 2 WFMOutpre:ENCdg? Argument H ASC This specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format. Wave- forms internally stored as integers will be sent as <NR1>...
Page 839: Wfmoutpre:nr_Fr
WFMOutpre:NR_FR? Description This query- -only command returns the number of frames for the DATa:SOUrce waveform transmitted in response to a CURVe? query. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? Syntax WFMOutpre:NR_FR? Example WFMOutpre:NR_FR? This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:NR_FR 500...
Page 840: Wfmoutpre:nr_Pt
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? Description This query- -only command returns the number of points for the DATa:SOUrce waveform that will be transmitted in response to a CURVe? query. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR? Syntax WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? Example...
Page 841: Wfmoutpre:pt_Fmt
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? Description This query- -only command returns the point format for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The format specifies a set of equations describing how the scale factors in the preamble are used to give meaning to the CURVe data points. An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Page 842: Wfmoutpre:pt_Off
WFMOutpre:PT_Off? Description This query- -only command returns the trigger point relative to DATa:STARt for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce com- mand. Note: This returned value is the point immediately following the actu- al trigger. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt, WFMOutpre:XZEro Syntax WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
Page 843: Wfmoutpre:pt_Or
WFMOutpre:PT_OR? Description This query- -only command specifies whether the source waveform is Fast Acquisition. A Fast Acquisition waveform is stored as a 200 (vertical) by 500 (horizontal) point bitmap. Each point represents dis- play intensity for that screen location. Only CURVe? query functions are allowed on Fast Acquisition waveforms.
Page 844: Wfmoutpre:wfid
WFMOutpre:WFId? Description This query- -only command returns a string describing several aspects of the acquisition parameters for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:SOUrce Syntax WFMOutpre:WFId?
Page 845 Waveform Suffixes Field Description Examples Source The source identification string as it ”Ch1--4” appears in the front panel scale factor ”Math1--3” readouts. ”Ref1--4” Coupling A string describing the vertical coupling of ”AC coupling” the waveform (the Source 1 waveform in ”DC coupling”...
Page 846: Wfmoutpre:xincr
WFMOutpre:XINcr? Description This query- -only command returns the horizontal point spacing in units of WFMOutpre:XUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. This value corresponds to the sampling inter- val. An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands...
Page 847: Wfmoutpre:xunit
WFMOutpre:XUNit? Description This query- -only command returns the horizontal units for the wave- form specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:SOUrce Syntax WFMOutpre:XUNit? Example WFMOutpre:XUNit? This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT ”Hz”...
Page 848: Wfmoutpre:xzero
WFMOutpre:XZEro? Description This query- -only command returns the sub- -sample time between the trigger sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actu- al trigger for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. This value is in units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Page 849: Wfmoutpre:ymult
WFMOutpre:YMUlt? Description This query- -only command returns the vertical scale factor per digitiz- ing level in units specified by WFMOutpre:YUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. For those formats in which WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr is important (all nonfloating point formats), WFMOutpre:YMUlt? must take the location of the binary point implied by BYT_NR into consideration.
Page 850: Wfmoutpre:yoff
WFMOutpre:YOFf? Description This query- -only command returns the vertical offset in digitized levels for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. For those formats in which BYT_NR is important (all non- -floating point for- mats), this command must take the location of the binary point implied by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr into consideration.
Page 851: Wfmoutpre:yunit
WFMOutpre:YUNit? Description This query- -only command returns the vertical units for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:SOUrce Syntax WFMOutpre:YUNit? Example WFMOutpre:YUNit? This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT ”dB”...
Page 852: Wfmoutpre:yzero
WFMOutpre:YZEro? Description This query- -only command returns the vertical offset in units specified by WFMOutpre:YUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:YUNit Syntax WFMOutpre:YZEro? Example...
Page 853: Wfmpre:nr_Fr
WFMPre:NR_FR? Description This query- -only command returns the number of frames for the wave- form transmitted in response to a CURVE? query. Group Waveform Transfer Related Commands CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?, Syntax WFMpre:NR_FR? Example WFMpre:NR_FR? This query might return...
Page 854: Wavfrm
WAVFrm? Description This query- -only command returns WFMOutpre? and CURVe? data for the waveform as specified by the DATA:SOUrce command. This com- mand is equivalent to sending both WFMOutpre? and CURVe?, with the additional provision that the response to WAVFrm? is guaranteed to provide a synchronized preamble and curve.
Page 855 4,34,34,36,33,36,34,36,33,34,33,34,32,34,32,34 ,33,33,31,33,32,34,32,33,32,32,31,33,31,31,32, 33,31,32,31,32,30,32,30,32,31,31,30,31,30,31,2 9,31,29,32,31,31,30,30,29,30,29,30,30,31,29,30 ,28,30,29,31,28,30,28,30,29,29,27,29,28,29,27, 30,27,30,26,28,28,29,27,28,27,28,27,28,28,28,2 7,28,27,28,26,28,26,28,26,26,25,27,25,28,27,28 ,26,25,25,26,25,25,25,25,25,26,25,27,25,25,24, 25,25,26,24,26,24,24,23,25,24,24,22,25,23,24,2 3,24,22,24,22,23,22,25,24,24,21,23,22,22,21,24 ,22,22,22,22,21,22,20,23,21,21,20 TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 835 --...
Page 856: Zoom
ZOOm Description This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces or live traces. The ZOOm query returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display. Group Zoom Syntax 1 ZOOm {RESET|RESETLive} Syntax 2 ZOOm? Arguments H RESET...
Page 857 Example 2 ZOOM RESET This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces. TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 837 --...
Page 858: Zoom:graticule:size
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE Description This command sets or queries the size, in percent, of the Zoom (lower) graticule. Group Zoom Syntax 1 ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE {50|80|100} Syntax 2 ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE? Arguments H 50 Set the size of the Zoom graticule to 50 %. H 80 Set the size of the Zoom graticule to 80 %.
Page 859: Zoom:mode
ZOOm:MODe Description This command turns Zoom mode on or off. The Zoom query returns the current state of Zoom mode. This command is equivalent to pressing the ZOOM button located on the front panel. Group Zoom Syntax 1 ZOOm:MODe {ON|OFF|<NR1>} Syntax 2 ZOOm:MODe Arguments...
Page 860: Zoom:scroll:direction
ZOOm:SCROLL:DIREction Description This command sets or returns the direction for automatic scrolling of zoomed waveforms. Group Zoom Syntax 1 ZOOm:SCROLL:DIREction {FWD|FFWD|REVerse| FREVerse|STOP} Syntax 2 ZOOm:SCROLL:DIREction? Arguments H FWD Starts AutoScroll. The Zoom Box moves from left to right. H FFWD Starts AutoScroll.
Page 861: Zoom:scroll:lock
ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk Description This command sets or returns the state of Scroll Lock, which ”locks” zoomed waveforms under common control. Group Zoom Syntax 1 ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk {ON|OFF|NR1} Syntax 2 ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk? Arguments H ON Enables Scroll Lock. H OFF Disables Scroll Lock. H <NR1> A 0 disables Scroll Lock for all zoom windows;...
Page 862: Zoom:scroll:speed
ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED Description This command sets or returns the speed of automatic scrolling. Group Zoom Syntax 1 ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED <NR1> Syntax 2 ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED? Arguments H <NR1> This is a value from 1 to 10. Example 1 ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED 2 AutoScroll will move zoomed waveform(s) 2 divisions per update. Example 2 ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED? This query might return...
Page 863: Zoom:graticule:split
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit Description This command sets or returns the sizes of the acquisition and zoom windows when Zoom is selected. Note: For this command to have an effect on the display, you must have the zoom mode turned on. Use the ZOOm:MODe command to turn on the zoom mode.
Page 864: Zoom:zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x> Description This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces of the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 repre- senting the desired zoom window. The ZOOm query returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display. Group Zoom Syntax 1...

Page 865: Zoom:zoom::Horizontal:position
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition Description This command sets or queries the horizontal position of the specified waveform for the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 rep- resenting the desired zoom window. The setting of the ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLOCk command determines the wave- forms that are affected.
Page 866: Zoom:zoom::Horizontal:scale
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle Description This command sets or queries the zoom horizontal scale factor of the specified waveform for the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window. Group Zoom Syntax 1 ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3> Syntax 2 ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle? Argument...
Page 867: Zoom:zoom::Vertical:position
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition Description This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified wa- veform for the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 repre- senting the desired zoom window. The setting of the ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLOCk command determines the wave- forms that are affected.
Page 868: Zoom:zoom::Vertical:scale
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle Description This command sets or queries the zoom vertical scale of the specified waveform for the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 rep- resenting the desired zoom window. Group Zoom Syntax 1 ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3> Syntax 2 ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle? Argument...
Page 869: Zoom:zoom:Scrolllock
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLock Description This command sets or queries Scroll Lock for the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom win- dow. Group Zoom Syntax 1 ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLock {ON|OFF|1|0|NR1} Syntax 2 ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLock? Arguments H ON {1} Locks waveforms for the specified zoom window <x>.
Page 870: Zoom:zoom:State
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE Description This command sets or queries the specified zoom on or off, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window. Default is Zoom1 on, Zoom2 - - 4 off. Group Zoom Syntax 1 ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>} Syntax 2 ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE?
Page 871: Status And Events
Status and Events The instrument provides a status and event reporting system for the GPIB interfaces. This system informs you of certain significant events that occur within the instrument. The instrument status handling system consists of five 8- -bit registers and two queues for each interface.
Page 872 Standard Event Status Register (SESR) SESR Bit Functions Function Power On. Shows that the oscilloscope (MSB) was powered on. On completion, the diagnostic tests also set this bit. User Request. Indicates that an application event has occurred. *See note. Command Error. Shows that an error occurred while the oscilloscope was parsing a command or query.
Page 873 SBR Bit Functions Function 7 (MSB) -------------- Not used. Request Service. Obtained from a serial poll. Shows that the oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB controller. Master Status Summary. Obtained from *STB? query. Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR. Event Status Bit.
Page 874 Event Status Enable Register (ESER) The Service Request Enable Register (SRER) - - This register controls which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status Summary (MSS) bit. Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to read the register.
Page 875: Queues
Queues *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power- - on. Sending *PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows: Output Queue The instrument stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this queue each time it receives a new command or query message after an <EOM>.
Page 876: Synchronization Methods
When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of event is enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is set to 1), the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one, and the event is recorded in the Event Queue (2).
Page 877 instrument will continue processing other commands. This means that some operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent. Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier operation. A first operation must complete before the next one gets pro- cessed.
Page 878 You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the instru- ment with your application program: *WAI, BUSY?, *OPC, and *OPC? *WAI The *WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate an OPC message. No commands after the *WAI are processed before the OPC message(s) are generated The same command sequence using the *WAI command for synchro- nization looks like this:...
Page 879 er becomes full, the controller will be unable to write more commands to the buffer. This can cause a time- -out. BUSY? The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the instrument is busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such as single- -sequence acquisition.
Page 880 operation is complete. You achieve synchronization by using this com- mand with either a serial poll or service request handler. Serial Poll Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE and *ESE commands.
Page 881 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE? This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY?. Service Request Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE and *ESE commands. You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Ser- vice Request Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE command.
Page 882 comes, interrupts those tasks and returns con- trol to this task. Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE? This technique is more efficient but requires more sophisticated pro- gramming. *OPC? The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation that generates an OPC message is complete.
Page 883: Messages
Messages Overview The information contained in the topic tabs above covers all the pro- gramming interface messages the instrument generates in response to commands and queries. For most messages, a secondary message from the instrument gives more detail about the cause of the error or the meaning of the message. This message is part of the message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon.
Page 884 Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5) Code Message Command error Invalid character Syntax error Invalid separator Data type error GET not allowed Parameter not allowed Missing parameter Command header error Header separator error Program mnemonic too long Undefined header Header suffix out of range Numeric data error Invalid character in number Exponent too large...
Page 885 2209 Measurement error, No second Mid Ref crossing 2210 Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform 2211 Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing 2212 Measurement error, No negative crossing 2213 Measurement error, No positive crossing 2214 Measurement error, No crossing 2215 Measurement error, No crossing, second waveform...
Page 886 2250 Reference error, Waveform reference file is invalid 2251 Reference error, Waveform preamble does not match actual 2252 Reference error, Source wfm is not valid 2253 Reference error, Too many points received 2254 Reference error, Too few points received 2259 File too big 2261 Calibration error, wait for the...
Page 887 System Event Messages Code Message Query event Power on (PON bit 7 set) Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set) User request (URQ bit 6 set) Power fail (DDE bit 3 set) Request control Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set) Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set) Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set) Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response (QYE bit 2 set)
Page 888: Programming Examples
TDS5000B Series Oscilloscope Pro- grammer Online Guide. To install the ”GPIB Programmer”, perform the following procedure: 1. Insert the TDS5000B Series Product Software CD in your CD drive. 2. Open the folder named GPIB Programmer. 3. Double- -click Setup.exe.
Page 889: Compiling Gpib Programs
Compiling GPIB Programs The example GPIB programs make the following assumptions: The GPIB controller board is ”GPIB0” (board 0). If you have more than one GPIB controller in your workstation, and you want to user a GPIB controller other than board 0, you must edit the source files accordingly.
Page 890 ..\GPIBWAIT.C ..\GPIBWRIT.C 6. Add the following source files provided by National Instruments to the project: ..\decl- -32.h ..gpib- -32.obj 7. Add the appropriate program main source file to the project (see Overview for a list of the three source files). 8.
Page 891: Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous Character Charts TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 871 --...
Page 892: Reserved Words
Reserved Words Overview This is a list of reserved words for the TDS5000B Series instruments. Capital letters identify the required minimum spelling. For the most robust code, use the full spelling, since spelling rules may change over time and among instrument models.
Page 893 DIR to MAXimum FASTAcq HARDCopy LABEL DIREction FILEName HBArs LAST DISplay FILESystem HDELTA LENgth DIVisions FILTer LESSLimit EDGE FIRST HEADer LEVEL EDGE2 FORMat HIGH LOCk ENCdg FRAME HIGHLimit LOGIc EVENT FREQuency HIStogram LOOP EVENTS FUNCtion HOLDoff LOOPS EVMsg GAIN HOLDTime EVQty GATEPOS HORizontal...
Page 894 MEAN to SIZe MEAN NUMITEMS PRObestate RESULT MEAS<x> OFFSet PT_Fmt RESults MEASUrement PAIred PT_Off RMDir METHod PALETTE PT_OR RUNT PASSword PULse SAMPLERate MID2 PATtern PUMODE SAVe MINimum PERCent READFile SCAle MKDir PERSistence RECAll SCREENSAVER MODe PHASE RECOrdlength SCREENSAVERDELAY MORELimit POLarity SELect NAMe PORT...
Page 895 SLOpe to ZOOm SLOpe SUPPress VALue XINcr SOURCE TERminator VARPersist XPOS SOURCE2 TEST VBArs XUNit SPAN THReshold VDELTA XZEro TIMe VERBose YMUlt SPECTral TIMEOut VOLtage YOFf SPLit TIMEStamp <wfm> YPOS STARt TRACk WAVEform YUNit STATE TRANsition WAVFrm YZEro STATIstics TRIGBar WEIghting ZOOm STDdev...
Page 896: Factory Default Setup Values
Factory Default Setup Values Default Setup The following tables list the default setup values by command group. The instrument sets these values when you press the front- -panel DE- FAULT SETUP button or sending the FACtory command. Only those commands that have values set by the DEFAULT SETUP function are listed in these tables.
Page 897 Cursor Default Values The following table lists the Cursor factory default setup values. Command Default Values CURSOR:FUNCTION VBARS CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 300.0000E-3 CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2 -300.0000E-3 CURSOR:LINESTYLE SOLID CURSOR:MODE INDEPENDENT CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1 -1.6000E-6 CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION2 1.6000E-6 CURSOR:SCREEN:STYLE LINES CURSOR:SOURCE1 CURSOR:SOURCE2 CURSOR:STATE CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1 -1.6000E-6 CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION2 1.6000E-6 CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS CURSOR:WAVEFORM:POSITION1 -1.6000E-6...
Page 898 Diagnostics Default Values The following table lists the Diagnostics factory default setup values. Command Default Values DIAG:LEVEL SUBSYS Dispaly Default Values The following table lists the Display factory default setup values. Command Default Values DISPLAY:CLOCK DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR DEFAULT DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW TEMPERATURE DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RECORDVIEW NORMAL DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CARET 150,50,100...
Page 899 DISPLAY:FORMAT DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL DISPLAY:INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT DISPLAY:INTENSITY:SCREENSAVER DISPLAY:INTENSITY:SCREENSAVERDELAY 28800 DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW 75.0000 DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:RECORDVIEW 75.0000 DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL1:NAME ”” DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL1:XPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL1:YPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:NAME ”” DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:XPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:YPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:NAME ”” DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:XPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:YPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:NAME ”” DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:XPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:YPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:NAME ”” DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:XPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:YPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:NAME ”” DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:XPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:YPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:NAME ”” DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:XPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:YPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:NAME ””...
Page 900 DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:YPOS DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:STATE DISPLAY:STYLE VECTORS DISPLAY:TRIGBAR SHORT DISPLAY:TRIGT DISPLAY:VARPERSIST 500.0000E-3 Email Default Values The following table lists the Email setup values. Command Default Values EMAIL:ATTEMPTS EMAIL:AUTHLOGIN ”” EMAIL:FROM ”TDS5054B_<Instrument Serial Number>” EMAIL:HOSTWANTED ”” EMAIL:IMAGE EMAIL:LIMIT EMAIL:MASK EMAIL:MAXSIZE EMAIL:MEASUREMENT EMAIL:NUMEMAILS EMAIL:SMTPPORT EMAIL:SMTPSERVER ””...
Page 901 Hardcopy Default Values The following table lists the Hardcopy factory default setup values. Command Default Values HARDCopy:FILEName ”” HARDCopy:PORT FILE Histogram Default Values The following table lists the Histogram factory default setup values. Command Default Values HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT 30.0000,25.1000,70.0000,75.2000 HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY LINEAR HISTOGRAM:FUNCTION HORIZONTAL HISTOGRAM:SIZE...
Page 902 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES :NUMFRAMES:REF<1-4> HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:READOUTS HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:SOURCE HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH1 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH2 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH3 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH4 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH1 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH2 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH3 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH4 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF1 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF2 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF3 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF4 HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SUMFRAME NONE HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK LIVE HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION 50.0000 HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SAMPLERATE 1.2500E+9 HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 400.0000E-9 HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 5000 HORIZONTAL:RESOLUTION 5000 HORIZONTAL:ROLL AUTO TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide -- 882 --...
Page 903 Limit Test Default Values The following table lists the Limit Test factory default setup values. Command Default Values LIMIT:BEEP LIMIT:COMPARE:<CH1-4> NONE LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH<1-4> NONE LIMIT:COMPARE:REF<1-4> NONE LIMIT:EMAIL LIMIT:HARDCOPY LIMIT:HIGHLIGHTHITS LIMIT:LOCK LIMIT:LOG LIMIT:SAVEWFM LIMIT:SRQ LIMIT:STATE LIMIT:STOPONVIOLATION LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL 40.0000E-3 LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:VERTICAL 40.0000E-3 Mask Default Values The following table lists the Mask factory default setup values.
Page 904 MASK:AUTOSET:VPOS MASK:AUTOSET:VSCALE MASK:COUNT:STATE MASK:DISPLAY MASK:FILTER MASK:HIGHLIGHTHITS MASK:INVERT MASK:LOCK MASK:MARGIN:PERCENT 5.0000 MASK:MARGIN:STATE MASK:MASKPRE:AMPLITUDE 100.0000E-3 MASK:MASKPRE:HSCALE 200.0000E-9 MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS 500.0000E-3 MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS MASK:MASKPRE:RECORDLENGTH 5000 MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP 0.0000 MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSET 0.0000 MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS 0.0000 MASK:MASKPRE:VSCALE 1.0000E-3 MASK:MASKPRE:WIDTH 0.0000 MASK:POLARITY POSITIVE MASK:SOURCE MASK:STANDARD NONE MASK:STOPONVIOLATION MASK:TEST:BEEP:COMPLETION MASK:TEST:BEEP:FAILURE MASK:TEST:DELAY 0.0000 MASK:TEST:HARDCOPY MASK:TEST:LOG:FAILURE...
Page 905 MASK:TEST:SAMPLE:THRESHOLD MASK:TEST:SAVEWFM MASK:TEST:SAVEWFM:FILENAME ”C:/TekScope/Waveforms/” MASK:TEST:SRQ:COMPLETION MASK:TEST:SRQ:FAILURE MASK:TEST:STATE MASK:TEST:STOP:FAILURE MASK:TEST:THRESHOLD MASK:TEST:WAVEFORM MASK:USER:AMPLITUDE 100.0000E-3 MASK:USER:BITRATE 1544000 MASK:USER:HSCALE 200.0000E-9 MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS 500.0000E-3 MASK:USER:LABEL ”User Mask” MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS MASK:USER:RECORDLENGTH 5000 MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP 0.0000 MASK:USER:VOFFSET 0.0000 MASK:USER:VPOS 0.0000 MASK:USER:VSCALE 1.0000E-3 MASK:USER:WIDTH 0.0000 Math Default Values The following table lists the Math factory default setup values. Command Default Values MATH<1-4>:DEFINE...
Page 906 <4> -600.0000E-3 MATH<1-4>::NUMAVG MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:CENTER 312.5000E+6 MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:GATEPOS 0.0000 MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:GATEWIDTH 2.0000E-6 MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:LOCK MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:MAG MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:PHASE DEGREES MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:REFLEVEL 20.0000 MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:REFLEVELOFFSET 223.6000E-3 MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:RESBW 1000.0000E+3 MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:SPAN 625.0000E+6 MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS -200.0000 MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:WINDOW GAUSSIAN MATH<1-4>:UNITSTRING ”V” MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000 MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000 MATHVAR:VAR<1-8> 0.0000 Measurement Default Values The following table lists the Measurement factory default setup values. Command Default Values MEASUREMENT:GATING...
Page 907 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.0000 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10.0000 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID1 50.0000 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 50.0000 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE PULSE MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE UNDEFINED MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:METHOD HISTOGRAM MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:NOISE HIGH MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0000 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1 0.0000 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.0000 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH9 0.0000 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW1...
Page 908 MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING Miscellaneous Default Values The following table lists the Miscellaneous factory default setup values. Command Default Values ALIAS:STATE 0 (OFF) AUXOUT:EDGE FALLING <cannot change> AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER CMDBATCH 1 (ON) HEADER 1 (ON) LOCK NONE ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL VERBOSE 1 (ON) Save and Recall Default Settings The following table lists the Save and Recall factory default setup val- ues.
Page 909 TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:STANDARD CUSTOM TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME 1.5000E-6 TRIGGER:A:LEVEL 0.0000 TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2 TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH3 TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E-9 TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 5.0000E-9 TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 1.2000 TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.2000 TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-9 TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 3.0000E-9 TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:<CH1-4>...
Page 910 TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH<1-4> HIGH TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESH- 1.2000 OLD:CH<1-4> TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000 TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW 800.0000E-3 TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH 2.0000E-9 TRIGGER:A:PULSE:SOURCE TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:TIME 2.0000E-9 TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-9 TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000 TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW 800.0000E-3 TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN FASTERTHAN TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9 TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E-9 TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN WITHIN TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT:CH<1-4> HIGH TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESH- 1.2000 OLD:<CH1-4>...
Page 911 TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:FIELD 0.0000 TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY NORMAL TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SCAN RATE1 TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SOURCE TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:STANDARD NTSC TRIGGER:B:BY EVENTS TRIGGER:B:EDGE:COUPLING TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE RISE TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT TRIGGER:B:LEVEL 0.0000 TRIGGER:B:STATE TRIGGER:B:TIME 16.0000E-9 TRIGGER:B:TYPE EDGE Vertical Default Values The following table lists the Vertical factory default setup values. Command Default Values CH<1-4>:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+6 CH<1-4>:COUPLING...
Page 912 CH<1-4>:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS ”V” CH<1-4>:SCALE 100.0000E-3 CH<1-4>:TERMINATION 1.0000E+6 DATA:DESTINATION REF1 DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY DATA:FRAMESTART DATA:FRAMESTOP 5000 DATA:SOURCE DATA:START DATA:STOP 5000 REF1:LABEL:NAME ”” REF1:LABEL:XPOS 1.0000 REF1:LABEL:YPOS -1.0000 REF2:LABEL:NAME ”” REF2:LABEL:XPOS 1.0000 REF2:LABEL:YPOS -1.4000 REF3:LABEL:NAME ”” REF3:LABEL:XPOS 1.0000 REF3:LABEL:YPOS -1.8000 REF4:LABEL:NAME ”” REF4:LABEL:XPOS 1.0000 REF4:LABEL:YPOS -2.2000 SELECT:CH1 SELECT:CH2...
Page 913 Waveform Default Values The following table lists the Waveform factory default setup values. Command Default Values DATA:DESTINATION REF1 DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY DATA:FRAMESTART DATA:FRAMESTOP 5000 DATA:SOURCE DATA:START DATA:STOP 5000 Zoom Default Values The following table lists the Zoom factory default setup values. Command Default Values ZOOM:GRATICULE:SIZE...
Page 914 ZOOM:ZOOM1:SCROLLLOCK ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 30.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 30.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 30.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM2:SCROLLLOCK ZOOM:ZOOM2:STATE ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 70.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 70.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 70.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION...
Page 915: Gpib Interface Specifications
ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 90.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 90.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000 ZOOM:ZOOM4:SCROLLLOCK ZOOM:ZOOM4:STATE GPIB Interface Specifications Overview This topic describes details of the GPIB remote interface of the instru- ment. Normally, you will not need this information to use the instru- ment, but this information may be useful if you are connecting to con- trollers with unusual configurations.
Page 916 GPIB Functions Interface Function Subset Description Acceptor The instrument can receive multiline Handshake messages across the GPIB from other devices. Controller This instrument can be operated as a device or as a controller. Device Clear The instrument can respond to both the DCL (Device Clear) interface message and to the Selected Device Clear (SDC) interface message when...
Page 917 Interface Messages The following table shows the standard interface messages that the in- strument supports. Standard Interface Messages Message GPIB Listen Addresses Talk Addresses This instrument may be operated as a GPIB controller or as a device. When Operated in controller mode, your controller software should respond to these interface messages.